7172 lines
		
	
	
		
			273 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			C++
		
	
	
	
			
		
		
	
	
			7172 lines
		
	
	
		
			273 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			C++
		
	
	
	
//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
 | 
						|
//
 | 
						|
// Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions.
 | 
						|
// See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information.
 | 
						|
// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception
 | 
						|
//
 | 
						|
//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
 | 
						|
//
 | 
						|
// Peephole optimize the CFG.
 | 
						|
//
 | 
						|
//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/MapVector.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/ScopeExit.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/Sequence.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Analysis/CaptureTracking.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Analysis/DomTreeUpdater.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Analysis/GuardUtils.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Analysis/MemorySSA.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Analysis/MemorySSAUpdater.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/ProfDataUtils.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
 | 
						|
#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
 | 
						|
#include <algorithm>
 | 
						|
#include <cassert>
 | 
						|
#include <climits>
 | 
						|
#include <cstddef>
 | 
						|
#include <cstdint>
 | 
						|
#include <iterator>
 | 
						|
#include <map>
 | 
						|
#include <set>
 | 
						|
#include <tuple>
 | 
						|
#include <utility>
 | 
						|
#include <vector>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
using namespace llvm;
 | 
						|
using namespace PatternMatch;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
cl::opt<bool> llvm::RequireAndPreserveDomTree(
 | 
						|
    "simplifycfg-require-and-preserve-domtree", cl::Hidden,
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    cl::desc("Temorary development switch used to gradually uplift SimplifyCFG "
 | 
						|
             "into preserving DomTree,"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
 | 
						|
// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
 | 
						|
// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
 | 
						|
// minimum reasonable default.
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
 | 
						|
    "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
 | 
						|
    cl::desc(
 | 
						|
        "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<unsigned> TwoEntryPHINodeFoldingThreshold(
 | 
						|
    "two-entry-phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(4),
 | 
						|
    cl::desc("Control the maximal total instruction cost that we are willing "
 | 
						|
             "to speculatively execute to fold a 2-entry PHI node into a "
 | 
						|
             "select (default = 4)"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<bool>
 | 
						|
    HoistCommon("simplifycfg-hoist-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
 | 
						|
                cl::desc("Hoist common instructions up to the parent block"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<bool>
 | 
						|
    SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
 | 
						|
               cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
 | 
						|
    "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
 | 
						|
    cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
 | 
						|
    "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
 | 
						|
    cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
 | 
						|
             "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
 | 
						|
             "predicated store"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
 | 
						|
    "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
 | 
						|
    cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
 | 
						|
             "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
 | 
						|
    "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
 | 
						|
    cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
 | 
						|
             "executed"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
 | 
						|
    "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
 | 
						|
    cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
 | 
						|
             "speculatively executed instructions"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<int>
 | 
						|
    MaxSmallBlockSize("simplifycfg-max-small-block-size", cl::Hidden,
 | 
						|
                      cl::init(10),
 | 
						|
                      cl::desc("Max size of a block which is still considered "
 | 
						|
                               "small enough to thread through"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Two is chosen to allow one negation and a logical combine.
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<unsigned>
 | 
						|
    BranchFoldThreshold("simplifycfg-branch-fold-threshold", cl::Hidden,
 | 
						|
                        cl::init(2),
 | 
						|
                        cl::desc("Maximum cost of combining conditions when "
 | 
						|
                                 "folding branches"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<unsigned> BranchFoldToCommonDestVectorMultiplier(
 | 
						|
    "simplifycfg-branch-fold-common-dest-vector-multiplier", cl::Hidden,
 | 
						|
    cl::init(2),
 | 
						|
    cl::desc("Multiplier to apply to threshold when determining whether or not "
 | 
						|
             "to fold branch to common destination when vector operations are "
 | 
						|
             "present"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<bool> EnableMergeCompatibleInvokes(
 | 
						|
    "simplifycfg-merge-compatible-invokes", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
 | 
						|
    cl::desc("Allow SimplifyCFG to merge invokes together when appropriate"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSwitchCasesPerResult(
 | 
						|
    "max-switch-cases-per-result", cl::Hidden, cl::init(16),
 | 
						|
    cl::desc("Limit cases to analyze when converting a switch to select"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
 | 
						|
          "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
 | 
						|
          "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(
 | 
						|
    NumLookupTablesHoles,
 | 
						|
    "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumFoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors,
 | 
						|
          "Number of value comparisons folded into predecessor basic blocks");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumFoldBranchToCommonDest,
 | 
						|
          "Number of branches folded into predecessor basic block");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(
 | 
						|
    NumHoistCommonCode,
 | 
						|
    "Number of common instruction 'blocks' hoisted up to the begin block");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumHoistCommonInstrs,
 | 
						|
          "Number of common instructions hoisted up to the begin block");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumSinkCommonCode,
 | 
						|
          "Number of common instruction 'blocks' sunk down to the end block");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumSinkCommonInstrs,
 | 
						|
          "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumInvokes,
 | 
						|
          "Number of invokes with empty resume blocks simplified into calls");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumInvokesMerged, "Number of invokes that were merged together");
 | 
						|
STATISTIC(NumInvokeSetsFormed, "Number of invoke sets that were formed");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
namespace {
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
 | 
						|
// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
 | 
						|
// cases composing the case group.
 | 
						|
using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
 | 
						|
    SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
 | 
						|
// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
 | 
						|
// switch for that PHI.
 | 
						|
using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
 | 
						|
struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *Value;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *Dest;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
 | 
						|
      : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
 | 
						|
    // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
 | 
						|
    return Value < RHS.Value;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
class SimplifyCFGOpt {
 | 
						|
  const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
 | 
						|
  DomTreeUpdater *DTU;
 | 
						|
  const DataLayout &DL;
 | 
						|
  ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders;
 | 
						|
  const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
 | 
						|
  bool Resimplify;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Value *isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI);
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
 | 
						|
      Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
 | 
						|
  bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(Instruction *TI,
 | 
						|
                                                     BasicBlock *Pred,
 | 
						|
                                                     IRBuilder<> &Builder);
 | 
						|
  bool PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(Instruction *TI, Value *&CV,
 | 
						|
                                                    Instruction *PTI,
 | 
						|
                                                    IRBuilder<> &Builder);
 | 
						|
  bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
 | 
						|
                                           IRBuilder<> &Builder);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool simplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
 | 
						|
  bool simplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
 | 
						|
  bool simplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
 | 
						|
  bool simplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
 | 
						|
  bool simplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
 | 
						|
  bool simplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
 | 
						|
  bool simplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
 | 
						|
  bool simplifyBranch(BranchInst *Branch, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
 | 
						|
  bool simplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
 | 
						|
  bool simplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICmpInst *ICI,
 | 
						|
                                             IRBuilder<> &Builder);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
 | 
						|
                             bool EqTermsOnly);
 | 
						|
  bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
 | 
						|
                              const TargetTransformInfo &TTI);
 | 
						|
  bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(Instruction *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
 | 
						|
                                  BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
 | 
						|
                                  uint32_t TrueWeight, uint32_t FalseWeight);
 | 
						|
  bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
 | 
						|
                                 const DataLayout &DL);
 | 
						|
  bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select);
 | 
						|
  bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI);
 | 
						|
  bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
public:
 | 
						|
  SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
 | 
						|
                 const DataLayout &DL, ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders,
 | 
						|
                 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
 | 
						|
      : TTI(TTI), DTU(DTU), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {
 | 
						|
    assert((!DTU || !DTU->hasPostDomTree()) &&
 | 
						|
           "SimplifyCFG is not yet capable of maintaining validity of a "
 | 
						|
           "PostDomTree, so don't ask for it.");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB);
 | 
						|
  bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Helper to set Resimplify and return change indication.
 | 
						|
  bool requestResimplify() {
 | 
						|
    Resimplify = true;
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
} // end anonymous namespace
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Return true if all the PHI nodes in the basic block \p BB
 | 
						|
/// receive compatible (identical) incoming values when coming from
 | 
						|
/// all of the predecessor blocks that are specified in \p IncomingBlocks.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// Note that if the values aren't exactly identical, but \p EquivalenceSet
 | 
						|
/// is provided, and *both* of the values are present in the set,
 | 
						|
/// then they are considered equal.
 | 
						|
static bool IncomingValuesAreCompatible(
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *BB, ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IncomingBlocks,
 | 
						|
    SmallPtrSetImpl<Value *> *EquivalenceSet = nullptr) {
 | 
						|
  assert(IncomingBlocks.size() == 2 &&
 | 
						|
         "Only for a pair of incoming blocks at the time!");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: it is okay if one of the incoming values is an `undef` value,
 | 
						|
  //        iff the other incoming value is guaranteed to be a non-poison value.
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: it is okay if one of the incoming values is a `poison` value.
 | 
						|
  return all_of(BB->phis(), [IncomingBlocks, EquivalenceSet](PHINode &PN) {
 | 
						|
    Value *IV0 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(IncomingBlocks[0]);
 | 
						|
    Value *IV1 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(IncomingBlocks[1]);
 | 
						|
    if (IV0 == IV1)
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    if (EquivalenceSet && EquivalenceSet->contains(IV0) &&
 | 
						|
        EquivalenceSet->contains(IV1))
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  });
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
 | 
						|
/// terminator instructions together.
 | 
						|
static bool
 | 
						|
SafeToMergeTerminators(Instruction *SI1, Instruction *SI2,
 | 
						|
                       SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
 | 
						|
  if (SI1 == SI2)
 | 
						|
    return false; // Can't merge with self!
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
 | 
						|
  // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
 | 
						|
  // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
 | 
						|
  bool Fail = false;
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB)) {
 | 
						|
    if (!SI1Succs.count(Succ))
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    if (IncomingValuesAreCompatible(Succ, {SI1BB, SI2BB}))
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    Fail = true;
 | 
						|
    if (FailBlocks)
 | 
						|
      FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
 | 
						|
    else
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return !Fail;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
 | 
						|
/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
 | 
						|
/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
 | 
						|
/// of Succ.
 | 
						|
static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
 | 
						|
                                  BasicBlock *ExistPred,
 | 
						|
                                  MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU = nullptr) {
 | 
						|
  for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
 | 
						|
    PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
 | 
						|
  if (MSSAU)
 | 
						|
    if (auto *MPhi = MSSAU->getMemorySSA()->getMemoryAccess(Succ))
 | 
						|
      MPhi->addIncoming(MPhi->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
 | 
						|
/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
 | 
						|
/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
 | 
						|
/// expensive.
 | 
						|
static InstructionCost computeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
 | 
						|
                                              const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  assert((!isa<Instruction>(I) ||
 | 
						|
          isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(cast<Instruction>(I))) &&
 | 
						|
         "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
 | 
						|
  return TTI.getInstructionCost(I, TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
 | 
						|
/// return true if the specified value dominates the block.  We
 | 
						|
/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
 | 
						|
/// which works well enough for us.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
 | 
						|
/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
 | 
						|
/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than Budget and
 | 
						|
/// are non-trapping.  If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
 | 
						|
/// set and true is returned.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
 | 
						|
/// Select whose cost is 2.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// After this function returns, Cost is increased by the cost of
 | 
						|
/// V plus its non-dominating operands.  If that cost is greater than
 | 
						|
/// Budget, false is returned and Cost is undefined.
 | 
						|
static bool dominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
 | 
						|
                                SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &AggressiveInsts,
 | 
						|
                                InstructionCost &Cost,
 | 
						|
                                InstructionCost Budget,
 | 
						|
                                const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
 | 
						|
                                unsigned Depth = 0) {
 | 
						|
  // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
 | 
						|
  // so limit the recursion depth.
 | 
						|
  // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
 | 
						|
  // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
 | 
						|
  if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
 | 
						|
  if (!I) {
 | 
						|
    // Non-instructions dominate all instructions and can be executed
 | 
						|
    // unconditionally.
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
 | 
						|
  // the bottom of this block.
 | 
						|
  if (PBB == BB)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
 | 
						|
  // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
 | 
						|
  // statement".  If not, it definitely dominates the region.
 | 
						|
  BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
 | 
						|
  if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
 | 
						|
  if (AggressiveInsts.count(I))
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition".  Check to
 | 
						|
  // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
 | 
						|
  // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition.  If so, hoist it out.
 | 
						|
  if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Cost += computeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
 | 
						|
  // (as long as it is safe to do so).
 | 
						|
  // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
 | 
						|
  // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
 | 
						|
  // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
 | 
						|
  // enabled further IR optimizations.
 | 
						|
  if (Cost > Budget &&
 | 
						|
      (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts.empty() || Depth > 0 ||
 | 
						|
       !Cost.isValid()))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
 | 
						|
  // not take us over the cost threshold.
 | 
						|
  for (Use &Op : I->operands())
 | 
						|
    if (!dominatesMergePoint(Op, BB, AggressiveInsts, Cost, Budget, TTI,
 | 
						|
                             Depth + 1))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  // Okay, it's safe to do this!  Remember this instruction.
 | 
						|
  AggressiveInsts.insert(I);
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
 | 
						|
/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
 | 
						|
static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
 | 
						|
  // Normal constant int.
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
 | 
						|
  if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy() ||
 | 
						|
      DL.isNonIntegralPointerType(V->getType()))
 | 
						|
    return CI;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
 | 
						|
  // ConstantInt if possible.
 | 
						|
  IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
 | 
						|
  if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
 | 
						|
    return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // IntToPtr const int.
 | 
						|
  if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
 | 
						|
    if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
 | 
						|
      if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
 | 
						|
        // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
 | 
						|
        if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
 | 
						|
          return CI;
 | 
						|
        else
 | 
						|
          return cast<ConstantInt>(
 | 
						|
              ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
  return nullptr;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
namespace {
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
 | 
						|
/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
 | 
						|
/// structure.
 | 
						|
/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
 | 
						|
/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
 | 
						|
/// representing the different cases for the switch.
 | 
						|
/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
 | 
						|
/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
 | 
						|
/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
 | 
						|
/// fail.
 | 
						|
struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
 | 
						|
  const DataLayout &DL;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /// Value found for the switch comparison
 | 
						|
  Value *CompValue = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
 | 
						|
  Value *Extra = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /// Set of integers to match in switch
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
 | 
						|
  unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
 | 
						|
  ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
 | 
						|
    gather(Cond);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
 | 
						|
  ConstantComparesGatherer &
 | 
						|
  operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
private:
 | 
						|
  /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
 | 
						|
  /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
 | 
						|
  bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
 | 
						|
    if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    CompValue = NewVal;
 | 
						|
    return (CompValue != nullptr);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
 | 
						|
  /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
 | 
						|
  /// match depending on isEQ).
 | 
						|
  /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
 | 
						|
  /// against is placed in CompValue.
 | 
						|
  /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
 | 
						|
  /// is found but the value compared to is different.
 | 
						|
  bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
 | 
						|
    // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
 | 
						|
    ICmpInst *ICI;
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *C;
 | 
						|
    if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
 | 
						|
          (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Value *RHSVal;
 | 
						|
    const APInt *RHSC;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Pattern match a special case
 | 
						|
    // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
 | 
						|
    // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
 | 
						|
    if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
 | 
						|
      // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
 | 
						|
      // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      /*
 | 
						|
         ONE  : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
 | 
						|
         x    : BITVECTOR(64);
 | 
						|
         y    : BITVECTOR(64);
 | 
						|
         z    : BITVECTOR(64);
 | 
						|
         mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
 | 
						|
         QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
 | 
						|
                ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y |  mask)))
 | 
						|
         );
 | 
						|
         QUERY( (y |  mask = y) =>
 | 
						|
                ((x |  mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
 | 
						|
         );
 | 
						|
      */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
 | 
						|
      // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
 | 
						|
      // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
 | 
						|
      // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
 | 
						|
      // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
 | 
						|
      // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
 | 
						|
      // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
 | 
						|
      // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
 | 
						|
      //
 | 
						|
      // mask = (1 << z)
 | 
						|
      // (x & ~mask) == y  --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
 | 
						|
      //
 | 
						|
      // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
 | 
						|
      // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Pattern match a special case:
 | 
						|
      /*
 | 
						|
        QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
 | 
						|
               ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y |  mask)))
 | 
						|
        );
 | 
						|
      */
 | 
						|
      if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
 | 
						|
                m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
 | 
						|
        APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
 | 
						|
        if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
 | 
						|
          // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
 | 
						|
          if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
 | 
						|
            return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          Vals.push_back(C);
 | 
						|
          Vals.push_back(
 | 
						|
              ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
 | 
						|
                               C->getValue() | Mask));
 | 
						|
          UsedICmps++;
 | 
						|
          return true;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Pattern match a special case:
 | 
						|
      /*
 | 
						|
        QUERY( (y |  mask = y) =>
 | 
						|
               ((x |  mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
 | 
						|
        );
 | 
						|
      */
 | 
						|
      if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
 | 
						|
                m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
 | 
						|
        APInt Mask = *RHSC;
 | 
						|
        if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
 | 
						|
          // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
 | 
						|
          if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
 | 
						|
            return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          Vals.push_back(C);
 | 
						|
          Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
 | 
						|
                                          C->getValue() & ~Mask));
 | 
						|
          UsedICmps++;
 | 
						|
          return true;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
 | 
						|
      if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      UsedICmps++;
 | 
						|
      Vals.push_back(C);
 | 
						|
      return ICI->getOperand(0);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
 | 
						|
    ConstantRange Span =
 | 
						|
        ConstantRange::makeExactICmpRegion(ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
 | 
						|
    // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
 | 
						|
    Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
 | 
						|
    if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
 | 
						|
      Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
 | 
						|
      CandidateVal = RHSVal;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
 | 
						|
    // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
 | 
						|
    // x != 0 && x != 1.
 | 
						|
    if (!isEQ)
 | 
						|
      Span = Span.inverse();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
 | 
						|
    if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
 | 
						|
    if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Add all values from the range to the set
 | 
						|
    for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
 | 
						|
      Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    UsedICmps++;
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
 | 
						|
  /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
 | 
						|
  /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
 | 
						|
  /// vector.
 | 
						|
  /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
 | 
						|
  void gather(Value *V) {
 | 
						|
    bool isEQ = match(V, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(), m_Value()));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
 | 
						|
    SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
 | 
						|
    SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Initialize
 | 
						|
    Visited.insert(V);
 | 
						|
    DFT.push_back(V);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    while (!DFT.empty()) {
 | 
						|
      V = DFT.pop_back_val();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
 | 
						|
        // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
 | 
						|
        Value *Op0, *Op1;
 | 
						|
        if (isEQ ? match(I, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(Op0), m_Value(Op1)))
 | 
						|
                 : match(I, m_LogicalAnd(m_Value(Op0), m_Value(Op1)))) {
 | 
						|
          if (Visited.insert(Op1).second)
 | 
						|
            DFT.push_back(Op1);
 | 
						|
          if (Visited.insert(Op0).second)
 | 
						|
            DFT.push_back(Op0);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          continue;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        // Try to match the current instruction
 | 
						|
        if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
 | 
						|
          // Match succeed, continue the loop
 | 
						|
          continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
 | 
						|
      // comparison against the same value as the others.
 | 
						|
      // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
 | 
						|
      if (!Extra) {
 | 
						|
        Extra = V;
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
 | 
						|
      CompValue = nullptr;
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
} // end anonymous namespace
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static void EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(Instruction *TI,
 | 
						|
                                      MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU = nullptr) {
 | 
						|
  Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
    Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
 | 
						|
  } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
    if (BI->isConditional())
 | 
						|
      Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
 | 
						|
  } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
    Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  TI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
  if (Cond)
 | 
						|
    RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond, nullptr, MSSAU);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
 | 
						|
/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
 | 
						|
Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI) {
 | 
						|
  Value *CV = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
    // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
 | 
						|
    // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
 | 
						|
    if (!SI->getParent()->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(128 / SI->getNumSuccessors()))
 | 
						|
      CV = SI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
 | 
						|
    if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
 | 
						|
      if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
 | 
						|
        if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
 | 
						|
          CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
 | 
						|
  if (CV) {
 | 
						|
    if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
 | 
						|
      Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
 | 
						|
      if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
 | 
						|
        CV = Ptr;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return CV;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Given a value comparison instruction,
 | 
						|
/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
 | 
						|
BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
 | 
						|
    Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
 | 
						|
  if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
    Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
 | 
						|
    for (auto Case : SI->cases())
 | 
						|
      Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
 | 
						|
                                                  Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
 | 
						|
    return SI->getDefaultDest();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
 | 
						|
  ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
 | 
						|
  Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
 | 
						|
      GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
 | 
						|
  return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
 | 
						|
/// in the list that match the specified block.
 | 
						|
static void
 | 
						|
EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
 | 
						|
                    std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
 | 
						|
  llvm::erase_value(Cases, BB);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
 | 
						|
static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
 | 
						|
                          std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
 | 
						|
  std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
 | 
						|
  if (V1->size() > V2->size())
 | 
						|
    std::swap(V1, V2);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (V1->empty())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  if (V1->size() == 1) {
 | 
						|
    // Just scan V2.
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
 | 
						|
    for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
      if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
 | 
						|
        return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
 | 
						|
  array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
 | 
						|
  array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
 | 
						|
  unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
 | 
						|
  while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
 | 
						|
    if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
 | 
						|
      ++i1;
 | 
						|
    else
 | 
						|
      ++i2;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
 | 
						|
// least one non-zero weight.
 | 
						|
static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
 | 
						|
  // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
 | 
						|
  // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
 | 
						|
  MDNode *N = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
 | 
						|
    N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
 | 
						|
  SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
 | 
						|
// exactly 2 weights.
 | 
						|
static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
 | 
						|
                             uint32_t FalseWeight) {
 | 
						|
  assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
 | 
						|
  // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
 | 
						|
  // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
 | 
						|
  MDNode *N = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
 | 
						|
    N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
 | 
						|
            .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
 | 
						|
  I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
 | 
						|
/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
 | 
						|
/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
 | 
						|
/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
 | 
						|
/// very limited form of jump threading.
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
 | 
						|
    Instruction *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
 | 
						|
  if (!PredVal)
 | 
						|
    return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
 | 
						|
  assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
 | 
						|
  if (ThisVal != PredVal)
 | 
						|
    return false; // Different predicates.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
 | 
						|
  // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
 | 
						|
  std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *PredDef =
 | 
						|
      GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
 | 
						|
  EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Find information about how control leaves this block.
 | 
						|
  std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
 | 
						|
  EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
 | 
						|
  // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
 | 
						|
  if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
 | 
						|
    // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
 | 
						|
    // PredCases.  If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
 | 
						|
    // can simplify TI.
 | 
						|
    if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
      // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead.  Convert it to a
 | 
						|
      // uncond br.
 | 
						|
      assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
 | 
						|
      // Insert the new branch.
 | 
						|
      Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
 | 
						|
      (void)NI;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
 | 
						|
      ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(PredDef);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
 | 
						|
                        << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
 | 
						|
                        << "\n");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (DTU)
 | 
						|
        DTU->applyUpdates(
 | 
						|
            {{DominatorTree::Delete, PredDef, ThisCases[0].Dest}});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SI = *cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
 | 
						|
    // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
 | 
						|
    SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
 | 
						|
    for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
      DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
 | 
						|
                      << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    SmallDenseMap<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NumPerSuccessorCases;
 | 
						|
    for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
 | 
						|
      --i;
 | 
						|
      auto *Successor = i->getCaseSuccessor();
 | 
						|
      if (DTU)
 | 
						|
        ++NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
 | 
						|
      if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
 | 
						|
        Successor->removePredecessor(PredDef);
 | 
						|
        SI.removeCase(i);
 | 
						|
        if (DTU)
 | 
						|
          --NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
      std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
 | 
						|
      for (const std::pair<BasicBlock *, int> &I : NumPerSuccessorCases)
 | 
						|
        if (I.second == 0)
 | 
						|
          Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PredDef, I.first});
 | 
						|
      DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value.  Find out
 | 
						|
  // which value (or set of values) this is.
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
    if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
 | 
						|
      if (TIV)
 | 
						|
        return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
 | 
						|
      TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
 | 
						|
  // BB.  Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
    if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
 | 
						|
      TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
 | 
						|
  if (!TheRealDest)
 | 
						|
    TheRealDest = ThisDef;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 2> RemovedSuccs;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
 | 
						|
    if (Succ != CheckEdge) {
 | 
						|
      if (Succ != TheRealDest)
 | 
						|
        RemovedSuccs.insert(Succ);
 | 
						|
      Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
 | 
						|
    } else
 | 
						|
      CheckEdge = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Insert the new branch.
 | 
						|
  Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
 | 
						|
  (void)NI;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
 | 
						|
                    << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
 | 
						|
                    << "\n");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
 | 
						|
  if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
    SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
 | 
						|
    Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccs.size());
 | 
						|
    for (auto *RemovedSucc : RemovedSuccs)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, TIBB, RemovedSucc});
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
namespace {
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
 | 
						|
/// integers that does not depend on their address.  This is important for
 | 
						|
/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
 | 
						|
struct ConstantIntOrdering {
 | 
						|
  bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
 | 
						|
    return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
} // end anonymous namespace
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
 | 
						|
                                    ConstantInt *const *P2) {
 | 
						|
  const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
 | 
						|
  const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
 | 
						|
  if (LHS == RHS)
 | 
						|
    return 0;
 | 
						|
  return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Get Weights of a given terminator, the default weight is at the front
 | 
						|
/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
 | 
						|
/// metadata.
 | 
						|
static void GetBranchWeights(Instruction *TI,
 | 
						|
                             SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
 | 
						|
  MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
 | 
						|
  assert(MD);
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
 | 
						|
    Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
 | 
						|
  // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
 | 
						|
  // default weight to be the first entry.
 | 
						|
  if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
    assert(Weights.size() == 2);
 | 
						|
    ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
 | 
						|
    if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
 | 
						|
      std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
 | 
						|
static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
 | 
						|
  uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
 | 
						|
  if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
 | 
						|
    unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
 | 
						|
    for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
 | 
						|
      I >>= Offset;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static void CloneInstructionsIntoPredecessorBlockAndUpdateSSAUses(
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *PredBlock, ValueToValueMapTy &VMap) {
 | 
						|
  Instruction *PTI = PredBlock->getTerminator();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
 | 
						|
  // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
 | 
						|
  // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
 | 
						|
  for (Instruction &BonusInst : *BB) {
 | 
						|
    if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst) || BonusInst.isTerminator())
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst.clone();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (PTI->getDebugLoc() != NewBonusInst->getDebugLoc()) {
 | 
						|
      // Unless the instruction has the same !dbg location as the original
 | 
						|
      // branch, drop it. When we fold the bonus instructions we want to make
 | 
						|
      // sure we reset their debug locations in order to avoid stepping on
 | 
						|
      // dead code caused by folding dead branches.
 | 
						|
      NewBonusInst->setDebugLoc(DebugLoc());
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
 | 
						|
                     RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
 | 
						|
    VMap[&BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
 | 
						|
    // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
 | 
						|
    // only given the branch precondition.
 | 
						|
    // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
 | 
						|
    // semantics we don't understand. We *can* preserve !annotation, because
 | 
						|
    // it is tied to the instruction itself, not the value or position.
 | 
						|
    // Similarly strip attributes on call parameters that may cause UB in
 | 
						|
    // location the call is moved to.
 | 
						|
    NewBonusInst->dropUndefImplyingAttrsAndUnknownMetadata(
 | 
						|
        LLVMContext::MD_annotation);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PTI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
 | 
						|
    NewBonusInst->takeName(&BonusInst);
 | 
						|
    BonusInst.setName(NewBonusInst->getName() + ".old");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Update (liveout) uses of bonus instructions,
 | 
						|
    // now that the bonus instruction has been cloned into predecessor.
 | 
						|
    // Note that we expect to be in a block-closed SSA form for this to work!
 | 
						|
    for (Use &U : make_early_inc_range(BonusInst.uses())) {
 | 
						|
      auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
 | 
						|
      auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI);
 | 
						|
      if (!PN) {
 | 
						|
        assert(UI->getParent() == BB && BonusInst.comesBefore(UI) &&
 | 
						|
               "If the user is not a PHI node, then it should be in the same "
 | 
						|
               "block as, and come after, the original bonus instruction.");
 | 
						|
        continue; // Keep using the original bonus instruction.
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      // Is this the block-closed SSA form PHI node?
 | 
						|
      if (PN->getIncomingBlock(U) == BB)
 | 
						|
        continue; // Great, keep using the original bonus instruction.
 | 
						|
      // The only other alternative is an "use" when coming from
 | 
						|
      // the predecessor block - here we should refer to the cloned bonus instr.
 | 
						|
      assert(PN->getIncomingBlock(U) == PredBlock &&
 | 
						|
             "Not in block-closed SSA form?");
 | 
						|
      U.set(NewBonusInst);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(
 | 
						|
    Instruction *TI, Value *&CV, Instruction *PTI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *Pred = PTI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 32> Updates;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
 | 
						|
  std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
 | 
						|
  // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
 | 
						|
  // build.
 | 
						|
  SmallMapVector<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NewSuccessors;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
 | 
						|
  bool PredHasWeights = hasBranchWeightMD(*PTI);
 | 
						|
  bool SuccHasWeights = hasBranchWeightMD(*TI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (PredHasWeights) {
 | 
						|
    GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
 | 
						|
    // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
 | 
						|
    if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
 | 
						|
      PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
 | 
						|
  } else if (SuccHasWeights)
 | 
						|
    // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
 | 
						|
    // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
 | 
						|
    // successor's weights
 | 
						|
    Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
 | 
						|
  if (SuccHasWeights) {
 | 
						|
    GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
 | 
						|
    // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
 | 
						|
    if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
 | 
						|
      PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
 | 
						|
  } else if (PredHasWeights)
 | 
						|
    SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (PredDefault == BB) {
 | 
						|
    // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
 | 
						|
    // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
 | 
						|
    std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
 | 
						|
    for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
      if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
 | 
						|
        PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
 | 
						|
      else {
 | 
						|
        // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
 | 
						|
        std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
 | 
						|
          // Increase weight for the default case.
 | 
						|
          Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
 | 
						|
          std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
 | 
						|
          Weights.pop_back();
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        PredCases.pop_back();
 | 
						|
        --i;
 | 
						|
        --e;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
 | 
						|
    if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
 | 
						|
      PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
 | 
						|
      if (DTU && PredDefault != BB)
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, PredDefault});
 | 
						|
      PredDefault = BBDefault;
 | 
						|
      ++NewSuccessors[BBDefault];
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
 | 
						|
    uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
 | 
						|
    for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
      if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) && BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
 | 
						|
        PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
 | 
						|
        ++NewSuccessors[BBCases[i].Dest];
 | 
						|
        if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
 | 
						|
          // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
 | 
						|
          // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
 | 
						|
          // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
 | 
						|
          Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
 | 
						|
          ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
 | 
						|
      ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
 | 
						|
      // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
 | 
						|
      for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
 | 
						|
        Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
 | 
						|
      // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
 | 
						|
      Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
 | 
						|
    // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
 | 
						|
    // activated.
 | 
						|
    std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
 | 
						|
    std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
 | 
						|
    for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
      if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
 | 
						|
        PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
 | 
						|
          WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
 | 
						|
          std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
 | 
						|
          Weights.pop_back();
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
 | 
						|
        PredCases.pop_back();
 | 
						|
        --i;
 | 
						|
        --e;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
 | 
						|
    // predecessor.  Figure out where they will all go now.
 | 
						|
    for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
      if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
 | 
						|
        // If this is one we are capable of getting...
 | 
						|
        if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
 | 
						|
          Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
 | 
						|
        PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
 | 
						|
        ++NewSuccessors[BBCases[i].Dest];
 | 
						|
        PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
 | 
						|
    // they must go to the default destination of TI.
 | 
						|
    for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
 | 
						|
      if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
 | 
						|
        Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
 | 
						|
      PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
 | 
						|
      ++NewSuccessors[BBDefault];
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get.  Make
 | 
						|
  // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
 | 
						|
  // successors.
 | 
						|
  SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 2> SuccsOfPred;
 | 
						|
  if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
    SuccsOfPred = {succ_begin(Pred), succ_end(Pred)};
 | 
						|
    Updates.reserve(Updates.size() + NewSuccessors.size());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for (const std::pair<BasicBlock *, int /*Num*/> &NewSuccessor :
 | 
						|
       NewSuccessors) {
 | 
						|
    for (auto I : seq(0, NewSuccessor.second)) {
 | 
						|
      (void)I;
 | 
						|
      AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor.first, Pred, BB);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (DTU && !SuccsOfPred.contains(NewSuccessor.first))
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, NewSuccessor.first});
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
 | 
						|
  // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
 | 
						|
  if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
 | 
						|
    CV =
 | 
						|
        Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()), "magicptr");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
 | 
						|
  SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
 | 
						|
  NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
 | 
						|
  for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
 | 
						|
    NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
 | 
						|
    // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
 | 
						|
    FitWeights(Weights);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(PTI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Okay, last check.  If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
 | 
						|
  // have an infinite loop case.  If so, add an infinitely looping block
 | 
						|
  // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
    if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
 | 
						|
      if (!InfLoopBlock) {
 | 
						|
        // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
 | 
						|
        // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
 | 
						|
        InfLoopBlock =
 | 
						|
            BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
 | 
						|
        BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
 | 
						|
        if (DTU)
 | 
						|
          Updates.push_back(
 | 
						|
              {DominatorTree::Insert, InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock});
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
    if (InfLoopBlock)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, InfLoopBlock});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, BB});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  ++NumFoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors;
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
 | 
						|
/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
 | 
						|
/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
 | 
						|
/// on the same value.  If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
 | 
						|
                                                         IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
 | 
						|
  assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool Changed = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
 | 
						|
  while (!Preds.empty()) {
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
 | 
						|
    Instruction *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Don't try to fold into itself.
 | 
						|
    if (Pred == BB)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
 | 
						|
    Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
 | 
						|
    if (PCV != CV)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> FailBlocks;
 | 
						|
    if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
 | 
						|
      for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
 | 
						|
        if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split", DTU))
 | 
						|
          return false;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    PerformValueComparisonIntoPredecessorFolding(TI, CV, PTI, Builder);
 | 
						|
    Changed = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return Changed;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
 | 
						|
// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
 | 
						|
// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
 | 
						|
static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
 | 
						|
                                Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
 | 
						|
    for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
 | 
						|
      Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
 | 
						|
      Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
 | 
						|
      if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I, bool PtrValueMayBeModified = false);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
 | 
						|
/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
 | 
						|
/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2. If EqTermsOnly is given,
 | 
						|
/// only perform hoisting in case both blocks only contain a terminator. In that
 | 
						|
/// case, only the original BI will be replaced and selects for PHIs are added.
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
 | 
						|
                                           const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
 | 
						|
                                           bool EqTermsOnly) {
 | 
						|
  // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
 | 
						|
  // instructions in the two blocks.  In particular, we don't want to get into
 | 
						|
  // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2.  As
 | 
						|
  // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
 | 
						|
  // identical order.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If either of the blocks has it's address taken, then we can't do this fold,
 | 
						|
  // because the code we'd hoist would no longer run when we jump into the block
 | 
						|
  // by it's address.
 | 
						|
  if (BB1->hasAddressTaken() || BB2->hasAddressTaken())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
 | 
						|
  // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
 | 
						|
  DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
 | 
						|
  DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
 | 
						|
  if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
 | 
						|
    while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
 | 
						|
      I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
 | 
						|
    while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
 | 
						|
      I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool Changed = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  auto _ = make_scope_exit([&]() {
 | 
						|
    if (Changed)
 | 
						|
      ++NumHoistCommonCode;
 | 
						|
  });
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check if only hoisting terminators is allowed. This does not add new
 | 
						|
  // instructions to the hoist location.
 | 
						|
  if (EqTermsOnly) {
 | 
						|
    // Skip any debug intrinsics, as they are free to hoist.
 | 
						|
    auto *I1NonDbg = &*skipDebugIntrinsics(I1->getIterator());
 | 
						|
    auto *I2NonDbg = &*skipDebugIntrinsics(I2->getIterator());
 | 
						|
    if (!I1NonDbg->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2NonDbg))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    if (!I1NonDbg->isTerminator())
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    // Now we know that we only need to hoist debug intrinsics and the
 | 
						|
    // terminator. Let the loop below handle those 2 cases.
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  do {
 | 
						|
    // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
 | 
						|
    // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
 | 
						|
    if (I1->isTerminator())
 | 
						|
      goto HoistTerminator;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If we're going to hoist a call, make sure that the two instructions we're
 | 
						|
    // commoning/hoisting are both marked with musttail, or neither of them is
 | 
						|
    // marked as such. Otherwise, we might end up in a situation where we hoist
 | 
						|
    // from a block where the terminator is a `ret` to a block where the terminator
 | 
						|
    // is a `br`, and `musttail` calls expect to be followed by a return.
 | 
						|
    auto *C1 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I1);
 | 
						|
    auto *C2 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I2);
 | 
						|
    if (C1 && C2)
 | 
						|
      if (C1->isMustTailCall() != C2->isMustTailCall())
 | 
						|
        return Changed;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
 | 
						|
      return Changed;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If any of the two call sites has nomerge attribute, stop hoisting.
 | 
						|
    if (const auto *CB1 = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I1))
 | 
						|
      if (CB1->cannotMerge())
 | 
						|
        return Changed;
 | 
						|
    if (const auto *CB2 = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I2))
 | 
						|
      if (CB2->cannotMerge())
 | 
						|
        return Changed;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) {
 | 
						|
      assert (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2));
 | 
						|
      // The debug location is an integral part of a debug info intrinsic
 | 
						|
      // and can't be separated from it or replaced.  Instead of attempting
 | 
						|
      // to merge locations, simply hoist both copies of the intrinsic.
 | 
						|
      BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
 | 
						|
                                     BB1->getInstList(), I1);
 | 
						|
      BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
 | 
						|
                                     BB2->getInstList(), I2);
 | 
						|
      Changed = true;
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
 | 
						|
      // then replace all uses of the other with the first.  Finally, we remove
 | 
						|
      // the now redundant second instruction.
 | 
						|
      BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
 | 
						|
                                     BB1->getInstList(), I1);
 | 
						|
      if (!I2->use_empty())
 | 
						|
        I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
 | 
						|
      I1->andIRFlags(I2);
 | 
						|
      unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
 | 
						|
                             LLVMContext::MD_range,
 | 
						|
                             LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
 | 
						|
                             LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
 | 
						|
                             LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
 | 
						|
                             LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
 | 
						|
                             LLVMContext::MD_align,
 | 
						|
                             LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
 | 
						|
                             LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
 | 
						|
                             LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access,
 | 
						|
                             LLVMContext::MD_access_group,
 | 
						|
                             LLVMContext::MD_preserve_access_index};
 | 
						|
      combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs, true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction.  Its debug
 | 
						|
      // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
 | 
						|
      I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      I2->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
      Changed = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    ++NumHoistCommonInstrs;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
 | 
						|
    I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
 | 
						|
    // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
 | 
						|
    DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
 | 
						|
    DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
 | 
						|
    if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
 | 
						|
      while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
 | 
						|
        I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
 | 
						|
      while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
 | 
						|
        I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
HoistTerminator:
 | 
						|
  // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: Can we define a safety predicate for CallBr?
 | 
						|
  if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
 | 
						|
    return Changed;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // TODO: callbr hoisting currently disabled pending further study.
 | 
						|
  if (isa<CallBrInst>(I1))
 | 
						|
    return Changed;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
 | 
						|
    for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
 | 
						|
      Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
 | 
						|
      Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
 | 
						|
      if (BB1V == BB2V)
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
 | 
						|
      // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
 | 
						|
      if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
 | 
						|
          passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
 | 
						|
        return Changed;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
 | 
						|
  Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
 | 
						|
  BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
 | 
						|
  if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
 | 
						|
    I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
 | 
						|
    I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
 | 
						|
    NT->takeName(I1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  Changed = true;
 | 
						|
  ++NumHoistCommonInstrs;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Ensure terminator gets a debug location, even an unknown one, in case
 | 
						|
  // it involves inlinable calls.
 | 
						|
  NT->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // PHIs created below will adopt NT's merged DebugLoc.
 | 
						|
  IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
 | 
						|
  // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
 | 
						|
  // them.  If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
 | 
						|
  // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
 | 
						|
  std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
 | 
						|
    for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
 | 
						|
      Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
 | 
						|
      Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
 | 
						|
      if (BB1V == BB2V)
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // These values do not agree.  Insert a select instruction before NT
 | 
						|
      // that determines the right value.
 | 
						|
      SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
 | 
						|
      if (!SI) {
 | 
						|
        // Propagate fast-math-flags from phi node to its replacement select.
 | 
						|
        IRBuilder<>::FastMathFlagGuard FMFGuard(Builder);
 | 
						|
        if (isa<FPMathOperator>(PN))
 | 
						|
          Builder.setFastMathFlags(PN.getFastMathFlags());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        SI = cast<SelectInst>(
 | 
						|
            Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
 | 
						|
                                 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
 | 
						|
      for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
        if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
 | 
						|
          PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 4> Updates;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
 | 
						|
    AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
 | 
						|
    if (DTU)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BIParent, Succ});
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BI))
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BIParent, Succ});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
  return Changed;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Check lifetime markers.
 | 
						|
static bool isLifeTimeMarker(const Instruction *I) {
 | 
						|
  if (auto II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I)) {
 | 
						|
    switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) {
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case Intrinsic::lifetime_start:
 | 
						|
    case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// TODO: Refine this. This should avoid cases like turning constant memcpy sizes
 | 
						|
// into variables.
 | 
						|
static bool replacingOperandWithVariableIsCheap(const Instruction *I,
 | 
						|
                                                int OpIdx) {
 | 
						|
  return !isa<IntrinsicInst>(I);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
 | 
						|
// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
 | 
						|
// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
 | 
						|
// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
 | 
						|
// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
 | 
						|
static bool canSinkInstructions(
 | 
						|
    ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
 | 
						|
    DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
 | 
						|
  // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Each instruction must have
 | 
						|
  // exactly zero or one use, and we check later that use is by a single, common
 | 
						|
  // PHI instruction in the successor.
 | 
						|
  bool HasUse = !Insts.front()->user_empty();
 | 
						|
  for (auto *I : Insts) {
 | 
						|
    // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
 | 
						|
    if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
 | 
						|
        I->getType()->isTokenTy())
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Do not try to sink an instruction in an infinite loop - it can cause
 | 
						|
    // this algorithm to infinite loop.
 | 
						|
    if (I->getParent()->getSingleSuccessor() == I->getParent())
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
 | 
						|
    // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
 | 
						|
    // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
 | 
						|
    // If the instruction has nomerge attribute, return false.
 | 
						|
    if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I))
 | 
						|
      if (C->isInlineAsm() || C->cannotMerge())
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Each instruction must have zero or one use.
 | 
						|
    if (HasUse && !I->hasOneUse())
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    if (!HasUse && !I->user_empty())
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
 | 
						|
  for (auto *I : Insts)
 | 
						|
    if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they have a
 | 
						|
  // use, check that the only user is a PHI or in the same block as the
 | 
						|
  // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction we're
 | 
						|
  // contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
 | 
						|
  if (HasUse) {
 | 
						|
    auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
 | 
						|
    auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
 | 
						|
    if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
 | 
						|
          auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
 | 
						|
          return (PNUse &&
 | 
						|
                  PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
 | 
						|
                  PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
 | 
						|
                 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
 | 
						|
        }))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not to sink
 | 
						|
  // loads, stores or lifetime markers of allocas when we'd have to create a
 | 
						|
  // PHI for the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or
 | 
						|
  // stores of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink
 | 
						|
  // them.
 | 
						|
  // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
 | 
						|
  // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
 | 
						|
  // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
 | 
						|
  if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
 | 
						|
        return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1)->stripPointerCasts());
 | 
						|
      }))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
 | 
						|
        return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0)->stripPointerCasts());
 | 
						|
      }))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  if (isLifeTimeMarker(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
 | 
						|
        return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1)->stripPointerCasts());
 | 
						|
      }))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // For calls to be sinkable, they must all be indirect, or have same callee.
 | 
						|
  // I.e. if we have two direct calls to different callees, we don't want to
 | 
						|
  // turn that into an indirect call. Likewise, if we have an indirect call,
 | 
						|
  // and a direct call, we don't actually want to have a single indirect call.
 | 
						|
  if (isa<CallBase>(I0)) {
 | 
						|
    auto IsIndirectCall = [](const Instruction *I) {
 | 
						|
      return cast<CallBase>(I)->isIndirectCall();
 | 
						|
    };
 | 
						|
    bool HaveIndirectCalls = any_of(Insts, IsIndirectCall);
 | 
						|
    bool AllCallsAreIndirect = all_of(Insts, IsIndirectCall);
 | 
						|
    if (HaveIndirectCalls) {
 | 
						|
      if (!AllCallsAreIndirect)
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      // All callees must be identical.
 | 
						|
      Value *Callee = nullptr;
 | 
						|
      for (const Instruction *I : Insts) {
 | 
						|
        Value *CurrCallee = cast<CallBase>(I)->getCalledOperand();
 | 
						|
        if (!Callee)
 | 
						|
          Callee = CurrCallee;
 | 
						|
        else if (Callee != CurrCallee)
 | 
						|
          return false;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
 | 
						|
    Value *Op = I0->getOperand(OI);
 | 
						|
    if (Op->getType()->isTokenTy())
 | 
						|
      // Don't touch any operand of token type.
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
 | 
						|
      assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
 | 
						|
      return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
 | 
						|
    };
 | 
						|
    if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
 | 
						|
      if ((isa<Constant>(Op) && !replacingOperandWithVariableIsCheap(I0, OI)) ||
 | 
						|
          !canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
 | 
						|
        // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
      for (auto *I : Insts)
 | 
						|
        PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Assuming canSinkInstructions(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
 | 
						|
// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
 | 
						|
// into one instruction.
 | 
						|
static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
 | 
						|
  auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // canSinkInstructions returning true guarantees that every block has at
 | 
						|
  // least one non-terminator instruction.
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
 | 
						|
  for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
 | 
						|
    Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
 | 
						|
    do {
 | 
						|
      I = I->getPrevNode();
 | 
						|
    } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
 | 
						|
    if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
 | 
						|
      Insts.push_back(I);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
 | 
						|
  // are the same PHI node. canSinkInstructions should have checked this but
 | 
						|
  // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative
 | 
						|
  // instructions so double-check it here.
 | 
						|
  Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
 | 
						|
  if (!I0->user_empty()) {
 | 
						|
    auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
 | 
						|
    if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
 | 
						|
          auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
 | 
						|
          return U == PNUse;
 | 
						|
        }))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkInstructions should
 | 
						|
  // have done it all for us.
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
 | 
						|
    // This check is different to that in canSinkInstructions. There, we
 | 
						|
    // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
 | 
						|
    // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
 | 
						|
    // simplifiable.  However here we need a more local view; if an operand
 | 
						|
    // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
 | 
						|
    // small mess we may make.
 | 
						|
    bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
 | 
						|
      return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
 | 
						|
    });
 | 
						|
    if (!NeedPHI) {
 | 
						|
      NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
 | 
						|
    auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
 | 
						|
    assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
 | 
						|
    auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
 | 
						|
                               Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
 | 
						|
    for (auto *I : Insts)
 | 
						|
      PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
 | 
						|
    NewOperands.push_back(PN);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
 | 
						|
  // and move it to the start of the successor block.
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
 | 
						|
    I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
 | 
						|
  I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
 | 
						|
  for (auto *I : Insts)
 | 
						|
    if (I != I0) {
 | 
						|
      // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
 | 
						|
      // of all the commoned instructions.  We start with the original location
 | 
						|
      // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
 | 
						|
      // loop below.
 | 
						|
      // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
 | 
						|
      // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
 | 
						|
      // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
 | 
						|
      I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
 | 
						|
      combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I, true);
 | 
						|
      I0->andIRFlags(I);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!I0->user_empty()) {
 | 
						|
    // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
 | 
						|
    // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
 | 
						|
    // instruction and nuke it.
 | 
						|
    auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
 | 
						|
    PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
 | 
						|
    PN->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
 | 
						|
  for (auto *I : Insts)
 | 
						|
    if (I != I0)
 | 
						|
      I->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
namespace {
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
 | 
						|
  // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
 | 
						|
  // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
 | 
						|
  //   LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
 | 
						|
  //   *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
 | 
						|
  //   *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
 | 
						|
  //   *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
 | 
						|
  //   ...
 | 
						|
  class LockstepReverseIterator {
 | 
						|
    ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
 | 
						|
    SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
 | 
						|
    bool Fail;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  public:
 | 
						|
    LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
 | 
						|
      reset();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    void reset() {
 | 
						|
      Fail = false;
 | 
						|
      Insts.clear();
 | 
						|
      for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
 | 
						|
        Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
 | 
						|
        for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
 | 
						|
          Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
 | 
						|
        if (!Inst) {
 | 
						|
          // Block wasn't big enough.
 | 
						|
          Fail = true;
 | 
						|
          return;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        Insts.push_back(Inst);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    bool isValid() const {
 | 
						|
      return !Fail;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    void operator--() {
 | 
						|
      if (Fail)
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
 | 
						|
        for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
 | 
						|
          Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
 | 
						|
        // Already at beginning of block.
 | 
						|
        if (!Inst) {
 | 
						|
          Fail = true;
 | 
						|
          return;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    void operator++() {
 | 
						|
      if (Fail)
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
 | 
						|
        for (Inst = Inst->getNextNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
 | 
						|
          Inst = Inst->getNextNode();
 | 
						|
        // Already at end of block.
 | 
						|
        if (!Inst) {
 | 
						|
          Fail = true;
 | 
						|
          return;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
 | 
						|
      return Insts;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
} // end anonymous namespace
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
 | 
						|
/// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
 | 
						|
static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB,
 | 
						|
                                           DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
 | 
						|
  // We support two situations:
 | 
						|
  //   (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
 | 
						|
  //   (2) there are non-unconditional incoming arcs
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
 | 
						|
  // else-if patterns;
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  //   if (a) f(1);
 | 
						|
  //   else if (b) f(2);
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // produces:
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  //       [if]
 | 
						|
  //      /    \
 | 
						|
  //    [f(1)] [if]
 | 
						|
  //      |     | \
 | 
						|
  //      |     |  |
 | 
						|
  //      |  [f(2)]|
 | 
						|
  //       \    | /
 | 
						|
  //        [ end ]
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
 | 
						|
  // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
 | 
						|
  // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
 | 
						|
  // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
 | 
						|
  // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
 | 
						|
  // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  //       [if]
 | 
						|
  //      /    \
 | 
						|
  //    [x(1)] [if]
 | 
						|
  //      |     | \
 | 
						|
  //      |     |  \
 | 
						|
  //      |  [x(2)] |
 | 
						|
  //       \   /    |
 | 
						|
  //   [sink.split] |
 | 
						|
  //         \     /
 | 
						|
  //         [ end ]
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
 | 
						|
  bool HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors = false;
 | 
						|
  for (auto *PredBB : predecessors(BB)) {
 | 
						|
    auto *PredBr = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBB->getTerminator());
 | 
						|
    if (PredBr && PredBr->isUnconditional())
 | 
						|
      UnconditionalPreds.push_back(PredBB);
 | 
						|
    else
 | 
						|
      HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
 | 
						|
  // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
 | 
						|
  // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
 | 
						|
  // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
 | 
						|
  // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
 | 
						|
  // PHIOperands.
 | 
						|
  int ScanIdx = 0;
 | 
						|
  SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
 | 
						|
  DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
 | 
						|
  LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
 | 
						|
  while (LRI.isValid() &&
 | 
						|
         canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
 | 
						|
    LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0]
 | 
						|
                      << "\n");
 | 
						|
    InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
 | 
						|
    ++ScanIdx;
 | 
						|
    --LRI;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
 | 
						|
  if (ScanIdx == 0)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool followedByDeoptOrUnreachable = IsBlockFollowedByDeoptOrUnreachable(BB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!followedByDeoptOrUnreachable) {
 | 
						|
    // Okay, we *could* sink last ScanIdx instructions. But how many can we
 | 
						|
    // actually sink before encountering instruction that is unprofitable to
 | 
						|
    // sink?
 | 
						|
    auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
 | 
						|
      unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
 | 
						|
      for (auto *I : *LRI)
 | 
						|
        for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I]) {
 | 
						|
          if (!InstructionsToSink.contains(V))
 | 
						|
            ++NumPHIdValues;
 | 
						|
          // FIXME: this check is overly optimistic. We may end up not sinking
 | 
						|
          // said instruction, due to the very same profitability check.
 | 
						|
          // See @creating_too_many_phis in sink-common-code.ll.
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
 | 
						|
      unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
 | 
						|
      if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
 | 
						|
        NumPHIInsts++;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
 | 
						|
    };
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // We've determined that we are going to sink last ScanIdx instructions,
 | 
						|
    // and recorded them in InstructionsToSink. Now, some instructions may be
 | 
						|
    // unprofitable to sink. But that determination depends on the instructions
 | 
						|
    // that we are going to sink.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // First, forward scan: find the first instruction unprofitable to sink,
 | 
						|
    // recording all the ones that are profitable to sink.
 | 
						|
    // FIXME: would it be better, after we detect that not all are profitable.
 | 
						|
    // to either record the profitable ones, or erase the unprofitable ones?
 | 
						|
    // Maybe we need to choose (at runtime) the one that will touch least
 | 
						|
    // instrs?
 | 
						|
    LRI.reset();
 | 
						|
    int Idx = 0;
 | 
						|
    SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> InstructionsProfitableToSink;
 | 
						|
    while (Idx < ScanIdx) {
 | 
						|
      if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
 | 
						|
        // Too many PHIs would be created.
 | 
						|
        LLVM_DEBUG(
 | 
						|
            dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      InstructionsProfitableToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
 | 
						|
      --LRI;
 | 
						|
      ++Idx;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
 | 
						|
    if (Idx == 0)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Did we determine that (only) some instructions are unprofitable to sink?
 | 
						|
    if (Idx < ScanIdx) {
 | 
						|
      // Okay, some instructions are unprofitable.
 | 
						|
      ScanIdx = Idx;
 | 
						|
      InstructionsToSink = InstructionsProfitableToSink;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // But, that may make other instructions unprofitable, too.
 | 
						|
      // So, do a backward scan, do any earlier instructions become
 | 
						|
      // unprofitable?
 | 
						|
      assert(
 | 
						|
          !ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) &&
 | 
						|
          "We already know that the last instruction is unprofitable to sink");
 | 
						|
      ++LRI;
 | 
						|
      --Idx;
 | 
						|
      while (Idx >= 0) {
 | 
						|
        // If we detect that an instruction becomes unprofitable to sink,
 | 
						|
        // all earlier instructions won't be sunk either,
 | 
						|
        // so preemptively keep InstructionsProfitableToSink in sync.
 | 
						|
        // FIXME: is this the most performant approach?
 | 
						|
        for (auto *I : *LRI)
 | 
						|
          InstructionsProfitableToSink.erase(I);
 | 
						|
        if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
 | 
						|
          // Everything starting with this instruction won't be sunk.
 | 
						|
          ScanIdx = Idx;
 | 
						|
          InstructionsToSink = InstructionsProfitableToSink;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        ++LRI;
 | 
						|
        --Idx;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If no instructions can be sunk, early-return.
 | 
						|
    if (ScanIdx == 0)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool Changed = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (HaveNonUnconditionalPredecessors) {
 | 
						|
    if (!followedByDeoptOrUnreachable) {
 | 
						|
      // It is always legal to sink common instructions from unconditional
 | 
						|
      // predecessors. However, if not all predecessors are unconditional,
 | 
						|
      // this transformation might be pessimizing. So as a rule of thumb,
 | 
						|
      // don't do it unless we'd sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
 | 
						|
      // See https://bugs.llvm.org/show_bug.cgi?id=30244
 | 
						|
      LRI.reset();
 | 
						|
      int Idx = 0;
 | 
						|
      bool Profitable = false;
 | 
						|
      while (Idx < ScanIdx) {
 | 
						|
        if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
 | 
						|
          Profitable = true;
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        --LRI;
 | 
						|
        ++Idx;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if (!Profitable)
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
 | 
						|
    // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
 | 
						|
    // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
 | 
						|
    if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split", DTU))
 | 
						|
      // Edges couldn't be split.
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    Changed = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
 | 
						|
  // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
 | 
						|
  // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
 | 
						|
  // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
 | 
						|
  // per sunk instruction).
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
 | 
						|
  // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
 | 
						|
  // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
 | 
						|
  // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
 | 
						|
  // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
 | 
						|
  // This is unlikely in practice though.
 | 
						|
  int SinkIdx = 0;
 | 
						|
  for (; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
 | 
						|
    LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
 | 
						|
                      << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
 | 
						|
                      << "\n");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
 | 
						|
    // sink is always at index 0.
 | 
						|
    LRI.reset();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds)) {
 | 
						|
      LLVM_DEBUG(
 | 
						|
          dbgs()
 | 
						|
          << "SINK: stopping here, failed to actually sink instruction!\n");
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    NumSinkCommonInstrs++;
 | 
						|
    Changed = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (SinkIdx != 0)
 | 
						|
    ++NumSinkCommonCode;
 | 
						|
  return Changed;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
namespace {
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
struct CompatibleSets {
 | 
						|
  using SetTy = SmallVector<InvokeInst *, 2>;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<SetTy, 1> Sets;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  static bool shouldBelongToSameSet(ArrayRef<InvokeInst *> Invokes);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SetTy &getCompatibleSet(InvokeInst *II);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  void insert(InvokeInst *II);
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
CompatibleSets::SetTy &CompatibleSets::getCompatibleSet(InvokeInst *II) {
 | 
						|
  // Perform a linear scan over all the existing sets, see if the new `invoke`
 | 
						|
  // is compatible with any particular set. Since we know that all the `invokes`
 | 
						|
  // within a set are compatible, only check the first `invoke` in each set.
 | 
						|
  // WARNING: at worst, this has quadratic complexity.
 | 
						|
  for (CompatibleSets::SetTy &Set : Sets) {
 | 
						|
    if (CompatibleSets::shouldBelongToSameSet({Set.front(), II}))
 | 
						|
      return Set;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Otherwise, we either had no sets yet, or this invoke forms a new set.
 | 
						|
  return Sets.emplace_back();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void CompatibleSets::insert(InvokeInst *II) {
 | 
						|
  getCompatibleSet(II).emplace_back(II);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool CompatibleSets::shouldBelongToSameSet(ArrayRef<InvokeInst *> Invokes) {
 | 
						|
  assert(Invokes.size() == 2 && "Always called with exactly two candidates.");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Can we theoretically merge these `invoke`s?
 | 
						|
  auto IsIllegalToMerge = [](InvokeInst *II) {
 | 
						|
    return II->cannotMerge() || II->isInlineAsm();
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
  if (any_of(Invokes, IsIllegalToMerge))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Either both `invoke`s must be   direct,
 | 
						|
  // or     both `invoke`s must be indirect.
 | 
						|
  auto IsIndirectCall = [](InvokeInst *II) { return II->isIndirectCall(); };
 | 
						|
  bool HaveIndirectCalls = any_of(Invokes, IsIndirectCall);
 | 
						|
  bool AllCallsAreIndirect = all_of(Invokes, IsIndirectCall);
 | 
						|
  if (HaveIndirectCalls) {
 | 
						|
    if (!AllCallsAreIndirect)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    // All callees must be identical.
 | 
						|
    Value *Callee = nullptr;
 | 
						|
    for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes) {
 | 
						|
      Value *CurrCallee = II->getCalledOperand();
 | 
						|
      assert(CurrCallee && "There is always a called operand.");
 | 
						|
      if (!Callee)
 | 
						|
        Callee = CurrCallee;
 | 
						|
      else if (Callee != CurrCallee)
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Either both `invoke`s must not have a normal destination,
 | 
						|
  // or     both `invoke`s must     have a normal destination,
 | 
						|
  auto HasNormalDest = [](InvokeInst *II) {
 | 
						|
    return !isa<UnreachableInst>(II->getNormalDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
  if (any_of(Invokes, HasNormalDest)) {
 | 
						|
    // Do not merge `invoke` that does not have a normal destination with one
 | 
						|
    // that does have a normal destination, even though doing so would be legal.
 | 
						|
    if (!all_of(Invokes, HasNormalDest))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // All normal destinations must be identical.
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *NormalBB = nullptr;
 | 
						|
    for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes) {
 | 
						|
      BasicBlock *CurrNormalBB = II->getNormalDest();
 | 
						|
      assert(CurrNormalBB && "There is always a 'continue to' basic block.");
 | 
						|
      if (!NormalBB)
 | 
						|
        NormalBB = CurrNormalBB;
 | 
						|
      else if (NormalBB != CurrNormalBB)
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // In the normal destination, the incoming values for these two `invoke`s
 | 
						|
    // must be compatible.
 | 
						|
    SmallPtrSet<Value *, 16> EquivalenceSet(Invokes.begin(), Invokes.end());
 | 
						|
    if (!IncomingValuesAreCompatible(
 | 
						|
            NormalBB, {Invokes[0]->getParent(), Invokes[1]->getParent()},
 | 
						|
            &EquivalenceSet))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#ifndef NDEBUG
 | 
						|
  // All unwind destinations must be identical.
 | 
						|
  // We know that because we have started from said unwind destination.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *UnwindBB = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes) {
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *CurrUnwindBB = II->getUnwindDest();
 | 
						|
    assert(CurrUnwindBB && "There is always an 'unwind to' basic block.");
 | 
						|
    if (!UnwindBB)
 | 
						|
      UnwindBB = CurrUnwindBB;
 | 
						|
    else
 | 
						|
      assert(UnwindBB == CurrUnwindBB && "Unexpected unwind destination.");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // In the unwind destination, the incoming values for these two `invoke`s
 | 
						|
  // must be compatible.
 | 
						|
  if (!IncomingValuesAreCompatible(
 | 
						|
          Invokes.front()->getUnwindDest(),
 | 
						|
          {Invokes[0]->getParent(), Invokes[1]->getParent()}))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Ignoring arguments, these `invoke`s must be identical,
 | 
						|
  // including operand bundles.
 | 
						|
  const InvokeInst *II0 = Invokes.front();
 | 
						|
  for (auto *II : Invokes.drop_front())
 | 
						|
    if (!II->isSameOperationAs(II0))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Can we theoretically form the data operands for the merged `invoke`?
 | 
						|
  auto IsIllegalToMergeArguments = [](auto Ops) {
 | 
						|
    Type *Ty = std::get<0>(Ops)->getType();
 | 
						|
    assert(Ty == std::get<1>(Ops)->getType() && "Incompatible types?");
 | 
						|
    return Ty->isTokenTy() && std::get<0>(Ops) != std::get<1>(Ops);
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
  assert(Invokes.size() == 2 && "Always called with exactly two candidates.");
 | 
						|
  if (any_of(zip(Invokes[0]->data_ops(), Invokes[1]->data_ops()),
 | 
						|
             IsIllegalToMergeArguments))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
} // namespace
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Merge all invokes in the provided set, all of which are compatible
 | 
						|
// as per the `CompatibleSets::shouldBelongToSameSet()`.
 | 
						|
static void MergeCompatibleInvokesImpl(ArrayRef<InvokeInst *> Invokes,
 | 
						|
                                       DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
 | 
						|
  assert(Invokes.size() >= 2 && "Must have at least two invokes to merge.");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 8> Updates;
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    Updates.reserve(2 + 3 * Invokes.size());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool HasNormalDest =
 | 
						|
      !isa<UnreachableInst>(Invokes[0]->getNormalDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Clone one of the invokes into a new basic block.
 | 
						|
  // Since they are all compatible, it doesn't matter which invoke is cloned.
 | 
						|
  InvokeInst *MergedInvoke = [&Invokes, HasNormalDest]() {
 | 
						|
    InvokeInst *II0 = Invokes.front();
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *II0BB = II0->getParent();
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *InsertBeforeBlock =
 | 
						|
        II0->getParent()->getIterator()->getNextNode();
 | 
						|
    Function *Func = II0BB->getParent();
 | 
						|
    LLVMContext &Ctx = II0->getContext();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *MergedInvokeBB = BasicBlock::Create(
 | 
						|
        Ctx, II0BB->getName() + ".invoke", Func, InsertBeforeBlock);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    auto *MergedInvoke = cast<InvokeInst>(II0->clone());
 | 
						|
    // NOTE: all invokes have the same attributes, so no handling needed.
 | 
						|
    MergedInvokeBB->getInstList().push_back(MergedInvoke);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!HasNormalDest) {
 | 
						|
      // This set does not have a normal destination,
 | 
						|
      // so just form a new block with unreachable terminator.
 | 
						|
      BasicBlock *MergedNormalDest = BasicBlock::Create(
 | 
						|
          Ctx, II0BB->getName() + ".cont", Func, InsertBeforeBlock);
 | 
						|
      new UnreachableInst(Ctx, MergedNormalDest);
 | 
						|
      MergedInvoke->setNormalDest(MergedNormalDest);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // The unwind destination, however, remainds identical for all invokes here.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    return MergedInvoke;
 | 
						|
  }();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
    // Predecessor blocks that contained these invokes will now branch to
 | 
						|
    // the new block that contains the merged invoke, ...
 | 
						|
    for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back(
 | 
						|
          {DominatorTree::Insert, II->getParent(), MergedInvoke->getParent()});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // ... which has the new `unreachable` block as normal destination,
 | 
						|
    // or unwinds to the (same for all `invoke`s in this set) `landingpad`,
 | 
						|
    for (BasicBlock *SuccBBOfMergedInvoke : successors(MergedInvoke))
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, MergedInvoke->getParent(),
 | 
						|
                         SuccBBOfMergedInvoke});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Since predecessor blocks now unconditionally branch to a new block,
 | 
						|
    // they no longer branch to their original successors.
 | 
						|
    for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes)
 | 
						|
      for (BasicBlock *SuccOfPredBB : successors(II->getParent()))
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back(
 | 
						|
            {DominatorTree::Delete, II->getParent(), SuccOfPredBB});
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool IsIndirectCall = Invokes[0]->isIndirectCall();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Form the merged operands for the merged invoke.
 | 
						|
  for (Use &U : MergedInvoke->operands()) {
 | 
						|
    // Only PHI together the indirect callees and data operands.
 | 
						|
    if (MergedInvoke->isCallee(&U)) {
 | 
						|
      if (!IsIndirectCall)
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
    } else if (!MergedInvoke->isDataOperand(&U))
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Don't create trivial PHI's with all-identical incoming values.
 | 
						|
    bool NeedPHI = any_of(Invokes, [&U](InvokeInst *II) {
 | 
						|
      return II->getOperand(U.getOperandNo()) != U.get();
 | 
						|
    });
 | 
						|
    if (!NeedPHI)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Form a PHI out of all the data ops under this index.
 | 
						|
    PHINode *PN = PHINode::Create(
 | 
						|
        U->getType(), /*NumReservedValues=*/Invokes.size(), "", MergedInvoke);
 | 
						|
    for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes)
 | 
						|
      PN->addIncoming(II->getOperand(U.getOperandNo()), II->getParent());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    U.set(PN);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We've ensured that each PHI node has compatible (identical) incoming values
 | 
						|
  // when coming from each of the `invoke`s in the current merge set,
 | 
						|
  // so update the PHI nodes accordingly.
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(MergedInvoke))
 | 
						|
    AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, /*NewPred=*/MergedInvoke->getParent(),
 | 
						|
                          /*ExistPred=*/Invokes.front()->getParent());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // And finally, replace the original `invoke`s with an unconditional branch
 | 
						|
  // to the block with the merged `invoke`. Also, give that merged `invoke`
 | 
						|
  // the merged debugloc of all the original `invoke`s.
 | 
						|
  const DILocation *MergedDebugLoc = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  for (InvokeInst *II : Invokes) {
 | 
						|
    // Compute the debug location common to all the original `invoke`s.
 | 
						|
    if (!MergedDebugLoc)
 | 
						|
      MergedDebugLoc = II->getDebugLoc();
 | 
						|
    else
 | 
						|
      MergedDebugLoc =
 | 
						|
          DILocation::getMergedLocation(MergedDebugLoc, II->getDebugLoc());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // And replace the old `invoke` with an unconditionally branch
 | 
						|
    // to the block with the merged `invoke`.
 | 
						|
    for (BasicBlock *OrigSuccBB : successors(II->getParent()))
 | 
						|
      OrigSuccBB->removePredecessor(II->getParent());
 | 
						|
    BranchInst::Create(MergedInvoke->getParent(), II->getParent());
 | 
						|
    II->replaceAllUsesWith(MergedInvoke);
 | 
						|
    II->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
    ++NumInvokesMerged;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  MergedInvoke->setDebugLoc(MergedDebugLoc);
 | 
						|
  ++NumInvokeSetsFormed;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If this block is a `landingpad` exception handling block, categorize all
 | 
						|
/// the predecessor `invoke`s into sets, with all `invoke`s in each set
 | 
						|
/// being "mergeable" together, and then merge invokes in each set together.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// This is a weird mix of hoisting and sinking. Visually, it goes from:
 | 
						|
///          [...]        [...]
 | 
						|
///            |            |
 | 
						|
///        [invoke0]    [invoke1]
 | 
						|
///           / \          / \
 | 
						|
///     [cont0] [landingpad] [cont1]
 | 
						|
/// to:
 | 
						|
///      [...] [...]
 | 
						|
///          \ /
 | 
						|
///       [invoke]
 | 
						|
///          / \
 | 
						|
///     [cont] [landingpad]
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// But of course we can only do that if the invokes share the `landingpad`,
 | 
						|
/// edges invoke0->cont0 and invoke1->cont1 are "compatible",
 | 
						|
/// and the invoked functions are "compatible".
 | 
						|
static bool MergeCompatibleInvokes(BasicBlock *BB, DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
 | 
						|
  if (!EnableMergeCompatibleInvokes)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool Changed = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: generalize to all exception handling blocks?
 | 
						|
  if (!BB->isLandingPad())
 | 
						|
    return Changed;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  CompatibleSets Grouper;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Record all the predecessors of this `landingpad`. As per verifier,
 | 
						|
  // the only allowed predecessor is the unwind edge of an `invoke`.
 | 
						|
  // We want to group "compatible" `invokes` into the same set to be merged.
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(BB))
 | 
						|
    Grouper.insert(cast<InvokeInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // And now, merge `invoke`s that were grouped togeter.
 | 
						|
  for (ArrayRef<InvokeInst *> Invokes : Grouper.Sets) {
 | 
						|
    if (Invokes.size() < 2)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    Changed = true;
 | 
						|
    MergeCompatibleInvokesImpl(Invokes, DTU);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return Changed;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
 | 
						|
/// conditional block.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// We are looking for code like the following:
 | 
						|
///   BrBB:
 | 
						|
///     store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
 | 
						|
///     ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
 | 
						|
///     ... // function).
 | 
						|
///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
 | 
						|
///     br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
 | 
						|
///   ThenBB:
 | 
						|
///     store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
 | 
						|
///     br label EndBB
 | 
						|
///   EndBB:
 | 
						|
///     ...
 | 
						|
///   We are going to transform this into:
 | 
						|
///   BrBB:
 | 
						|
///     store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
 | 
						|
///     ... //
 | 
						|
///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
 | 
						|
///     %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
 | 
						|
///     store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
 | 
						|
///     ...
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
 | 
						|
///         hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
 | 
						|
static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
 | 
						|
                                     BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
 | 
						|
  StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
 | 
						|
  if (!StoreToHoist)
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Volatile or atomic.
 | 
						|
  if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
 | 
						|
  Type *StoreTy = StoreToHoist->getValueOperand()->getType();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
 | 
						|
  unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
 | 
						|
  // Skip pseudo probe intrinsic calls which are not really killing any memory
 | 
						|
  // accesses.
 | 
						|
  for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(BrBB->instructionsWithoutDebug(true))) {
 | 
						|
    if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
 | 
						|
    if (CurI.mayWriteToMemory() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
 | 
						|
      return nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
 | 
						|
      // Found the previous store to same location and type. Make sure it is
 | 
						|
      // simple, to avoid introducing a spurious non-atomic write after an
 | 
						|
      // atomic write.
 | 
						|
      if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr &&
 | 
						|
          SI->getValueOperand()->getType() == StoreTy && SI->isSimple())
 | 
						|
        // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
 | 
						|
        return SI->getValueOperand();
 | 
						|
      return nullptr; // Unknown store.
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(&CurI)) {
 | 
						|
      if (LI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr && LI->getType() == StoreTy &&
 | 
						|
          LI->isSimple()) {
 | 
						|
        // Local objects (created by an `alloca` instruction) are always
 | 
						|
        // writable, so once we are past a read from a location it is valid to
 | 
						|
        // also write to that same location.
 | 
						|
        // If the address of the local object never escapes the function, that
 | 
						|
        // means it's never concurrently read or written, hence moving the store
 | 
						|
        // from under the condition will not introduce a data race.
 | 
						|
        auto *AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(getUnderlyingObject(StorePtr));
 | 
						|
        if (AI && !PointerMayBeCaptured(AI, false, true))
 | 
						|
          // Found a previous load, return it.
 | 
						|
          return LI;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      // The load didn't work out, but we may still find a store.
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return nullptr;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Estimate the cost of the insertion(s) and check that the PHI nodes can be
 | 
						|
/// converted to selects.
 | 
						|
static bool validateAndCostRequiredSelects(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
 | 
						|
                                           BasicBlock *EndBB,
 | 
						|
                                           unsigned &SpeculatedInstructions,
 | 
						|
                                           InstructionCost &Cost,
 | 
						|
                                           const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  TargetTransformInfo::TargetCostKind CostKind =
 | 
						|
    BB->getParent()->hasMinSize()
 | 
						|
    ? TargetTransformInfo::TCK_CodeSize
 | 
						|
    : TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
 | 
						|
  for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
 | 
						|
    Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
 | 
						|
    Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
 | 
						|
    // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
 | 
						|
    if (ThenV == OrigV)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Cost += TTI.getCmpSelInstrCost(Instruction::Select, PN.getType(), nullptr,
 | 
						|
                                   CmpInst::BAD_ICMP_PREDICATE, CostKind);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
 | 
						|
    if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
 | 
						|
        passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
 | 
						|
    ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
 | 
						|
    ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
 | 
						|
    if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
 | 
						|
      continue; // Known cheap (FIXME: Maybe not true for aggregates).
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    InstructionCost OrigCost = OrigCE ? computeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
 | 
						|
    InstructionCost ThenCost = ThenCE ? computeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
 | 
						|
    InstructionCost MaxCost =
 | 
						|
        2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
 | 
						|
    if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
 | 
						|
    // getting expanded into Instructions.
 | 
						|
    // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
 | 
						|
    // constant expression.
 | 
						|
    ++SpeculatedInstructions;
 | 
						|
    if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return HaveRewritablePHIs;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
 | 
						|
/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
 | 
						|
/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
 | 
						|
/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
 | 
						|
/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
 | 
						|
/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
 | 
						|
/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
 | 
						|
/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
 | 
						|
/// \code
 | 
						|
///   BB:
 | 
						|
///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
 | 
						|
///     br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
 | 
						|
///   ThenBB:
 | 
						|
///     %sub = sub %x, %y
 | 
						|
///     br label BB2
 | 
						|
///   EndBB:
 | 
						|
///     %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
 | 
						|
///     ...
 | 
						|
/// \endcode
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// Into this IR:
 | 
						|
/// \code
 | 
						|
///   BB:
 | 
						|
///     %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
 | 
						|
///     %sub = sub %x, %y
 | 
						|
///     %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
 | 
						|
///     ...
 | 
						|
/// \endcode
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
 | 
						|
                                            const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
 | 
						|
  Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
 | 
						|
  InstructionCost Budget =
 | 
						|
      PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
 | 
						|
  // to swap the select operands later.
 | 
						|
  bool Invert = false;
 | 
						|
  if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
 | 
						|
    assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
 | 
						|
    Invert = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the branch is non-unpredictable, and is predicted to *not* branch to
 | 
						|
  // the `then` block, then avoid speculating it.
 | 
						|
  if (!BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable)) {
 | 
						|
    uint64_t TWeight, FWeight;
 | 
						|
    if (extractBranchWeights(*BI, TWeight, FWeight) &&
 | 
						|
        (TWeight + FWeight) != 0) {
 | 
						|
      uint64_t EndWeight = Invert ? TWeight : FWeight;
 | 
						|
      BranchProbability BIEndProb =
 | 
						|
          BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(EndWeight, TWeight + FWeight);
 | 
						|
      BranchProbability Likely = TTI.getPredictableBranchThreshold();
 | 
						|
      if (BIEndProb >= Likely)
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within ThenBB when
 | 
						|
  // they are candidates for sinking into ThenBB. Specifically:
 | 
						|
  // - They are defined in BB, and
 | 
						|
  // - They have no side effects, and
 | 
						|
  // - All of their uses are in ThenBB.
 | 
						|
  SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  unsigned SpeculatedInstructions = 0;
 | 
						|
  Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
 | 
						|
                            BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
 | 
						|
       BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
 | 
						|
    Instruction *I = &*BBI;
 | 
						|
    // Skip debug info.
 | 
						|
    if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
 | 
						|
      SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Skip pseudo probes. The consequence is we lose track of the branch
 | 
						|
    // probability for ThenBB, which is fine since the optimization here takes
 | 
						|
    // place regardless of the branch probability.
 | 
						|
    if (isa<PseudoProbeInst>(I)) {
 | 
						|
      // The probe should be deleted so that it will not be over-counted when
 | 
						|
      // the samples collected on the non-conditional path are counted towards
 | 
						|
      // the conditional path. We leave it for the counts inference algorithm to
 | 
						|
      // figure out a proper count for an unknown probe.
 | 
						|
      SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
 | 
						|
    // terminator) for now.
 | 
						|
    ++SpeculatedInstructions;
 | 
						|
    if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
 | 
						|
    if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
 | 
						|
        !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
 | 
						|
                                  I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
 | 
						|
        computeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
 | 
						|
            PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Store the store speculation candidate.
 | 
						|
    if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
 | 
						|
      SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
 | 
						|
    // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
 | 
						|
    // being sunk into the use block.
 | 
						|
    for (Use &Op : I->operands()) {
 | 
						|
      Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Op);
 | 
						|
      if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
 | 
						|
        continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in ThenBB as costs for
 | 
						|
  // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
 | 
						|
  // and so iteration order isn't significant.
 | 
						|
  for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
 | 
						|
           I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
 | 
						|
           E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
 | 
						|
       I != E; ++I)
 | 
						|
    if (I->first->hasNUses(I->second)) {
 | 
						|
      ++SpeculatedInstructions;
 | 
						|
      if (SpeculatedInstructions > 1)
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check that we can insert the selects and that it's not too expensive to do
 | 
						|
  // so.
 | 
						|
  bool Convert = SpeculatedStore != nullptr;
 | 
						|
  InstructionCost Cost = 0;
 | 
						|
  Convert |= validateAndCostRequiredSelects(BB, ThenBB, EndBB,
 | 
						|
                                            SpeculatedInstructions,
 | 
						|
                                            Cost, TTI);
 | 
						|
  if (!Convert || Cost > Budget)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
 | 
						|
  LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
 | 
						|
  if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
 | 
						|
    IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
 | 
						|
    Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
 | 
						|
    Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
 | 
						|
    if (Invert)
 | 
						|
      std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
 | 
						|
    Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
 | 
						|
        BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
 | 
						|
    SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
 | 
						|
    SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
 | 
						|
                                         SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
 | 
						|
  // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction. Drop the debug loc
 | 
						|
  // to avoid making it appear as if the condition is a constant, which would
 | 
						|
  // be misleading while debugging.
 | 
						|
  // Similarly strip attributes that maybe dependent on condition we are
 | 
						|
  // hoisting above.
 | 
						|
  for (auto &I : *ThenBB) {
 | 
						|
    if (!SpeculatedStoreValue || &I != SpeculatedStore)
 | 
						|
      I.setDebugLoc(DebugLoc());
 | 
						|
    I.dropUndefImplyingAttrsAndUnknownMetadata();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Hoist the instructions.
 | 
						|
  BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
 | 
						|
                           ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
 | 
						|
  IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
 | 
						|
  for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
 | 
						|
    unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
 | 
						|
    unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
 | 
						|
    Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
 | 
						|
    Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
 | 
						|
    if (OrigV == ThenV)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
 | 
						|
    // false value is the pre-existing value. Swap them if the branch
 | 
						|
    // destinations were inverted.
 | 
						|
    Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
 | 
						|
    if (Invert)
 | 
						|
      std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
 | 
						|
    Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
 | 
						|
    PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
 | 
						|
    PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
 | 
						|
  // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
 | 
						|
  for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
 | 
						|
    I->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  ++NumSpeculations;
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
 | 
						|
static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
 | 
						|
  int Size = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallPtrSet<const Value *, 32> EphValues;
 | 
						|
  auto IsEphemeral = [&](const Instruction *I) {
 | 
						|
    if (isa<AssumeInst>(I))
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    return !I->mayHaveSideEffects() && !I->isTerminator() &&
 | 
						|
           all_of(I->users(),
 | 
						|
                  [&](const User *U) { return EphValues.count(U); });
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Walk the loop in reverse so that we can identify ephemeral values properly
 | 
						|
  // (values only feeding assumes).
 | 
						|
  for (Instruction &I : reverse(BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(false))) {
 | 
						|
    // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
 | 
						|
    if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I))
 | 
						|
      if (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent())
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Ignore ephemeral values which are deleted during codegen.
 | 
						|
    if (IsEphemeral(&I))
 | 
						|
      EphValues.insert(&I);
 | 
						|
    // We will delete Phis while threading, so Phis should not be accounted in
 | 
						|
    // block's size.
 | 
						|
    else if (!isa<PHINode>(I)) {
 | 
						|
      if (Size++ > MaxSmallBlockSize)
 | 
						|
        return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
 | 
						|
    // live outside of the current basic block.
 | 
						|
    for (User *U : I.users()) {
 | 
						|
      Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
 | 
						|
      if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Looks ok, continue checking.
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static ConstantInt *getKnownValueOnEdge(Value *V, BasicBlock *From,
 | 
						|
                                        BasicBlock *To) {
 | 
						|
  // Don't look past the block defining the value, we might get the value from
 | 
						|
  // a previous loop iteration.
 | 
						|
  auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
 | 
						|
  if (I && I->getParent() == To)
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We know the value if the From block branches on it.
 | 
						|
  auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(From->getTerminator());
 | 
						|
  if (BI && BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition() == V &&
 | 
						|
      BI->getSuccessor(0) != BI->getSuccessor(1))
 | 
						|
    return BI->getSuccessor(0) == To ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BI->getContext())
 | 
						|
                                     : ConstantInt::getFalse(BI->getContext());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return nullptr;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If we have a conditional branch on something for which we know the constant
 | 
						|
/// value in predecessors (e.g. a phi node in the current block), thread edges
 | 
						|
/// from the predecessor to their ultimate destination.
 | 
						|
static Optional<bool>
 | 
						|
FoldCondBranchOnValueKnownInPredecessorImpl(BranchInst *BI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
 | 
						|
                                            const DataLayout &DL,
 | 
						|
                                            AssumptionCache *AC) {
 | 
						|
  SmallMapVector<ConstantInt *, SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 2>, 2> KnownValues;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  Value *Cond = BI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(Cond);
 | 
						|
  if (PN && PN->getParent() == BB) {
 | 
						|
    // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
 | 
						|
    if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
 | 
						|
      FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    for (Use &U : PN->incoming_values())
 | 
						|
      if (auto *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(U))
 | 
						|
        KnownValues[CB].insert(PN->getIncomingBlock(U));
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    for (BasicBlock *Pred : predecessors(BB)) {
 | 
						|
      if (ConstantInt *CB = getKnownValueOnEdge(Cond, Pred, BB))
 | 
						|
        KnownValues[CB].insert(Pred);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (KnownValues.empty())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
 | 
						|
  // Check that the block is small enough and values defined in the block are
 | 
						|
  // not used outside of it.
 | 
						|
  if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (const auto &Pair : KnownValues) {
 | 
						|
    // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
 | 
						|
    // branch to RealDest.
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *CB = Pair.first;
 | 
						|
    ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> PredBBs = Pair.second.getArrayRef();
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (RealDest == BB)
 | 
						|
      continue; // Skip self loops.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
 | 
						|
    if (any_of(PredBBs, [](BasicBlock *PredBB) {
 | 
						|
          return isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator());
 | 
						|
        }))
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    LLVM_DEBUG({
 | 
						|
      dbgs() << "Condition " << *Cond << " in " << BB->getName()
 | 
						|
             << " has value " << *Pair.first << " in predecessors:\n";
 | 
						|
      for (const BasicBlock *PredBB : Pair.second)
 | 
						|
        dbgs() << "  " << PredBB->getName() << "\n";
 | 
						|
      dbgs() << "Threading to destination " << RealDest->getName() << ".\n";
 | 
						|
    });
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Split the predecessors we are threading into a new edge block. We'll
 | 
						|
    // clone the instructions into this block, and then redirect it to RealDest.
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *EdgeBB = SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, PredBBs, ".critedge", DTU);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // TODO: These just exist to reduce test diff, we can drop them if we like.
 | 
						|
    EdgeBB->setName(RealDest->getName() + ".critedge");
 | 
						|
    EdgeBB->moveBefore(RealDest);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Update PHI nodes.
 | 
						|
    AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over.  Clone these
 | 
						|
    // instructions into EdgeBB.  We know that there will be no uses of the
 | 
						|
    // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
 | 
						|
    DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
 | 
						|
    TranslateMap[Cond] = CB;
 | 
						|
    for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
 | 
						|
      if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
 | 
						|
        TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(EdgeBB);
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      // Clone the instruction.
 | 
						|
      Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
 | 
						|
      if (BBI->hasName())
 | 
						|
        N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Update operands due to translation.
 | 
						|
      for (Use &Op : N->operands()) {
 | 
						|
        DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(Op);
 | 
						|
        if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
 | 
						|
          Op = PI->second;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Check for trivial simplification.
 | 
						|
      if (Value *V = simplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
 | 
						|
        if (!BBI->use_empty())
 | 
						|
          TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
 | 
						|
        if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
 | 
						|
          N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
 | 
						|
          N = nullptr;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        if (!BBI->use_empty())
 | 
						|
          TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if (N) {
 | 
						|
        // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
 | 
						|
        EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
 | 
						|
        if (auto *Assume = dyn_cast<AssumeInst>(N))
 | 
						|
          if (AC)
 | 
						|
            AC->registerAssumption(Assume);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    BB->removePredecessor(EdgeBB);
 | 
						|
    BranchInst *EdgeBI = cast<BranchInst>(EdgeBB->getTerminator());
 | 
						|
    EdgeBI->setSuccessor(0, RealDest);
 | 
						|
    EdgeBI->setDebugLoc(BI->getDebugLoc());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
      SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, EdgeBB, BB});
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, EdgeBB, RealDest});
 | 
						|
      DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // For simplicity, we created a separate basic block for the edge. Merge
 | 
						|
    // it back into the predecessor if possible. This not only avoids
 | 
						|
    // unnecessary SimplifyCFG iterations, but also makes sure that we don't
 | 
						|
    // bypass the check for trivial cycles above.
 | 
						|
    MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(EdgeBB, DTU);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Signal repeat, simplifying any other constants.
 | 
						|
    return None;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool FoldCondBranchOnValueKnownInPredecessor(BranchInst *BI,
 | 
						|
                                                    DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
 | 
						|
                                                    const DataLayout &DL,
 | 
						|
                                                    AssumptionCache *AC) {
 | 
						|
  Optional<bool> Result;
 | 
						|
  bool EverChanged = false;
 | 
						|
  do {
 | 
						|
    // Note that None means "we changed things, but recurse further."
 | 
						|
    Result = FoldCondBranchOnValueKnownInPredecessorImpl(BI, DTU, DL, AC);
 | 
						|
    EverChanged |= Result == None || *Result;
 | 
						|
  } while (Result == None);
 | 
						|
  return EverChanged;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
 | 
						|
/// see if we can eliminate it.
 | 
						|
static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
 | 
						|
                                DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL) {
 | 
						|
  // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node.  Check to see if this is a simple "if
 | 
						|
  // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure.  Basically, we
 | 
						|
  // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
 | 
						|
  // subsequently causes this merge to happen.  We really want control
 | 
						|
  // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
 | 
						|
  // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
 | 
						|
  BranchInst *DomBI = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
 | 
						|
  if (!DomBI)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  Value *IfCond = DomBI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
 | 
						|
  if (isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *DomBlock = DomBI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 2> IfBlocks;
 | 
						|
  llvm::copy_if(
 | 
						|
      PN->blocks(), std::back_inserter(IfBlocks), [](BasicBlock *IfBlock) {
 | 
						|
        return cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock->getTerminator())->isUnconditional();
 | 
						|
      });
 | 
						|
  assert((IfBlocks.size() == 1 || IfBlocks.size() == 2) &&
 | 
						|
         "Will have either one or two blocks to speculate.");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the branch is non-unpredictable, see if we either predictably jump to
 | 
						|
  // the merge bb (if we have only a single 'then' block), or if we predictably
 | 
						|
  // jump to one specific 'then' block (if we have two of them).
 | 
						|
  // It isn't beneficial to speculatively execute the code
 | 
						|
  // from the block that we know is predictably not entered.
 | 
						|
  if (!DomBI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable)) {
 | 
						|
    uint64_t TWeight, FWeight;
 | 
						|
    if (extractBranchWeights(*DomBI, TWeight, FWeight) &&
 | 
						|
        (TWeight + FWeight) != 0) {
 | 
						|
      BranchProbability BITrueProb =
 | 
						|
          BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(TWeight, TWeight + FWeight);
 | 
						|
      BranchProbability Likely = TTI.getPredictableBranchThreshold();
 | 
						|
      BranchProbability BIFalseProb = BITrueProb.getCompl();
 | 
						|
      if (IfBlocks.size() == 1) {
 | 
						|
        BranchProbability BIBBProb =
 | 
						|
            DomBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BITrueProb : BIFalseProb;
 | 
						|
        if (BIBBProb >= Likely)
 | 
						|
          return false;
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        if (BITrueProb >= Likely || BIFalseProb >= Likely)
 | 
						|
          return false;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Don't try to fold an unreachable block. For example, the phi node itself
 | 
						|
  // can't be the candidate if-condition for a select that we want to form.
 | 
						|
  if (auto *IfCondPhiInst = dyn_cast<PHINode>(IfCond))
 | 
						|
    if (IfCondPhiInst->getParent() == BB)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
 | 
						|
  // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
 | 
						|
  // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
 | 
						|
  // doesn't support cmov's).  Only do this transformation if there are two or
 | 
						|
  // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
 | 
						|
  unsigned NumPhis = 0;
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
 | 
						|
    if (NumPhis > 2)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
 | 
						|
  // instructions.  While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
 | 
						|
  // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
 | 
						|
  SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
 | 
						|
  InstructionCost Cost = 0;
 | 
						|
  InstructionCost Budget =
 | 
						|
      TwoEntryPHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool Changed = false;
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
 | 
						|
    PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
 | 
						|
    if (Value *V = simplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
 | 
						|
      PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
 | 
						|
      PN->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
      Changed = true;
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!dominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, AggressiveInsts,
 | 
						|
                             Cost, Budget, TTI) ||
 | 
						|
        !dominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, AggressiveInsts,
 | 
						|
                             Cost, Budget, TTI))
 | 
						|
      return Changed;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point.  Refresh it.  If
 | 
						|
  // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
 | 
						|
  PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
 | 
						|
  if (!PN)
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Return true if at least one of these is a 'not', and another is either
 | 
						|
  // a 'not' too, or a constant.
 | 
						|
  auto CanHoistNotFromBothValues = [](Value *V0, Value *V1) {
 | 
						|
    if (!match(V0, m_Not(m_Value())))
 | 
						|
      std::swap(V0, V1);
 | 
						|
    auto Invertible = m_CombineOr(m_Not(m_Value()), m_AnyIntegralConstant());
 | 
						|
    return match(V0, m_Not(m_Value())) && match(V1, Invertible);
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators or
 | 
						|
  // (possibly inverted) select form of or/ands,  unless one of
 | 
						|
  // the incoming values is an 'not' and another one is freely invertible.
 | 
						|
  // These can often be turned into switches and other things.
 | 
						|
  auto IsBinOpOrAnd = [](Value *V) {
 | 
						|
    return match(
 | 
						|
        V, m_CombineOr(
 | 
						|
               m_BinOp(),
 | 
						|
               m_CombineOr(m_Select(m_Value(), m_ImmConstant(), m_Value()),
 | 
						|
                           m_Select(m_Value(), m_Value(), m_ImmConstant()))));
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
  if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
 | 
						|
      (IsBinOpOrAnd(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
 | 
						|
       IsBinOpOrAnd(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) || IsBinOpOrAnd(IfCond)) &&
 | 
						|
      !CanHoistNotFromBothValues(PN->getIncomingValue(0),
 | 
						|
                                 PN->getIncomingValue(1)))
 | 
						|
    return Changed;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
 | 
						|
  // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
 | 
						|
  // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
 | 
						|
  // instructions.
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *IfBlock : IfBlocks)
 | 
						|
    for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
 | 
						|
      if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !I->isDebugOrPseudoInst()) {
 | 
						|
        // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
 | 
						|
        // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
 | 
						|
        // the xform is not worth it.
 | 
						|
        return Changed;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If either of the blocks has it's address taken, we can't do this fold.
 | 
						|
  if (any_of(IfBlocks,
 | 
						|
             [](BasicBlock *IfBlock) { return IfBlock->hasAddressTaken(); }))
 | 
						|
    return Changed;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION!  " << *IfCond
 | 
						|
                    << "  T: " << IfTrue->getName()
 | 
						|
                    << "  F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
 | 
						|
  // do all of the PHI's now.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
 | 
						|
  // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *IfBlock : IfBlocks)
 | 
						|
      hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, DomBI, IfBlock);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(DomBI);
 | 
						|
  // Propagate fast-math-flags from phi nodes to replacement selects.
 | 
						|
  IRBuilder<>::FastMathFlagGuard FMFGuard(Builder);
 | 
						|
  while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
 | 
						|
    if (isa<FPMathOperator>(PN))
 | 
						|
      Builder.setFastMathFlags(PN->getFastMathFlags());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
 | 
						|
    Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(IfTrue);
 | 
						|
    Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(IfFalse);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", DomBI);
 | 
						|
    PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
 | 
						|
    Sel->takeName(PN);
 | 
						|
    PN->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // At this point, all IfBlocks are empty, so our if statement
 | 
						|
  // has been flattened.  Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
 | 
						|
  // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
 | 
						|
  Builder.CreateBr(BB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 3> Updates;
 | 
						|
  if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
    Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, DomBlock, BB});
 | 
						|
    for (auto *Successor : successors(DomBlock))
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, DomBlock, Successor});
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  DomBI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static Value *createLogicalOp(IRBuilderBase &Builder,
 | 
						|
                              Instruction::BinaryOps Opc, Value *LHS,
 | 
						|
                              Value *RHS, const Twine &Name = "") {
 | 
						|
  // Try to relax logical op to binary op.
 | 
						|
  if (impliesPoison(RHS, LHS))
 | 
						|
    return Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, LHS, RHS, Name);
 | 
						|
  if (Opc == Instruction::And)
 | 
						|
    return Builder.CreateLogicalAnd(LHS, RHS, Name);
 | 
						|
  if (Opc == Instruction::Or)
 | 
						|
    return Builder.CreateLogicalOr(LHS, RHS, Name);
 | 
						|
  llvm_unreachable("Invalid logical opcode");
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
 | 
						|
/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
 | 
						|
/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
 | 
						|
static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
 | 
						|
                                   uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
 | 
						|
                                   uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
 | 
						|
                                   uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
 | 
						|
                                   uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
 | 
						|
  bool PredHasWeights =
 | 
						|
      extractBranchWeights(*PBI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
 | 
						|
  bool SuccHasWeights =
 | 
						|
      extractBranchWeights(*BI, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
 | 
						|
  if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
 | 
						|
    if (!PredHasWeights)
 | 
						|
      PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
 | 
						|
    if (!SuccHasWeights)
 | 
						|
      SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Determine if the two branches share a common destination and deduce a glue
 | 
						|
/// that joins the branches' conditions to arrive at the common destination if
 | 
						|
/// that would be profitable.
 | 
						|
static Optional<std::pair<Instruction::BinaryOps, bool>>
 | 
						|
shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BranchInst *BI, BranchInst *PBI,
 | 
						|
                                          const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) {
 | 
						|
  assert(BI && PBI && BI->isConditional() && PBI->isConditional() &&
 | 
						|
         "Both blocks must end with a conditional branches.");
 | 
						|
  assert(is_contained(predecessors(BI->getParent()), PBI->getParent()) &&
 | 
						|
         "PredBB must be a predecessor of BB.");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We have the potential to fold the conditions together, but if the
 | 
						|
  // predecessor branch is predictable, we may not want to merge them.
 | 
						|
  uint64_t PTWeight, PFWeight;
 | 
						|
  BranchProbability PBITrueProb, Likely;
 | 
						|
  if (TTI && !PBI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable) &&
 | 
						|
      extractBranchWeights(*PBI, PTWeight, PFWeight) &&
 | 
						|
      (PTWeight + PFWeight) != 0) {
 | 
						|
    PBITrueProb =
 | 
						|
        BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(PTWeight, PTWeight + PFWeight);
 | 
						|
    Likely = TTI->getPredictableBranchThreshold();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
 | 
						|
    // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably true.
 | 
						|
    if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb < Likely)
 | 
						|
      return {{Instruction::Or, false}};
 | 
						|
  } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
 | 
						|
    // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably false.
 | 
						|
    if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb.getCompl() < Likely)
 | 
						|
      return {{Instruction::And, false}};
 | 
						|
  } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
 | 
						|
    // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably true.
 | 
						|
    if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb < Likely)
 | 
						|
      return {{Instruction::And, true}};
 | 
						|
  } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
 | 
						|
    // Speculate the 2nd condition unless the 1st is probably false.
 | 
						|
    if (PBITrueProb.isUnknown() || PBITrueProb.getCompl() < Likely)
 | 
						|
      return {{Instruction::Or, true}};
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return None;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool performBranchToCommonDestFolding(BranchInst *BI, BranchInst *PBI,
 | 
						|
                                             DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
 | 
						|
                                             MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU,
 | 
						|
                                             const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) {
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *PredBlock = PBI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
 | 
						|
  Instruction::BinaryOps Opc;
 | 
						|
  bool InvertPredCond;
 | 
						|
  std::tie(Opc, InvertPredCond) =
 | 
						|
      *shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BI, PBI, TTI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
 | 
						|
  // The builder is used to create instructions to eliminate the branch in BB.
 | 
						|
  // If BB's terminator has !annotation metadata, add it to the new
 | 
						|
  // instructions.
 | 
						|
  Builder.CollectMetadataToCopy(BB->getTerminator(),
 | 
						|
                                {LLVMContext::MD_annotation});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
 | 
						|
  if (InvertPredCond) {
 | 
						|
    Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
    if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
 | 
						|
      CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
 | 
						|
      CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      NewCond =
 | 
						|
          Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
 | 
						|
    PBI->swapSuccessors();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *UniqueSucc =
 | 
						|
      PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(0) : BI->getSuccessor(1);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Before cloning instructions, notify the successor basic block that it
 | 
						|
  // is about to have a new predecessor. This will update PHI nodes,
 | 
						|
  // which will allow us to update live-out uses of bonus instructions.
 | 
						|
  AddPredecessorToBlock(UniqueSucc, PredBlock, BB, MSSAU);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Try to update branch weights.
 | 
						|
  uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
 | 
						|
  if (extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
 | 
						|
                             SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight)) {
 | 
						|
    SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
 | 
						|
      // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
 | 
						|
      // BI:  br i1 %y, UniqueSucc, FalseDest
 | 
						|
      // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
 | 
						|
      NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
 | 
						|
      // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
 | 
						|
      //               TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
 | 
						|
      // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
 | 
						|
      // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
 | 
						|
      NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
 | 
						|
                               (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
 | 
						|
                           PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
 | 
						|
      // BI:  br i1 %y, TrueDest, UniqueSucc
 | 
						|
      // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
 | 
						|
      //              FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
 | 
						|
      NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
 | 
						|
                           PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
 | 
						|
      // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
 | 
						|
      NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
 | 
						|
    FitWeights(NewWeights);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(), NewWeights.end());
 | 
						|
    setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
 | 
						|
    // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
 | 
						|
  } else
 | 
						|
    PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Now, update the CFG.
 | 
						|
  PBI->setSuccessor(PBI->getSuccessor(0) != BB, UniqueSucc);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Insert, PredBlock, UniqueSucc},
 | 
						|
                       {DominatorTree::Delete, PredBlock, BB}});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
 | 
						|
  // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
 | 
						|
  if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
 | 
						|
    PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
 | 
						|
  CloneInstructionsIntoPredecessorBlockAndUpdateSSAUses(BB, PredBlock, VMap);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Now that the Cond was cloned into the predecessor basic block,
 | 
						|
  // or/and the two conditions together.
 | 
						|
  Value *BICond = VMap[BI->getCondition()];
 | 
						|
  PBI->setCondition(
 | 
						|
      createLogicalOp(Builder, Opc, PBI->getCondition(), BICond, "or.cond"));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
 | 
						|
  for (Instruction &I : *BB) {
 | 
						|
    if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
 | 
						|
      Instruction *NewI = I.clone();
 | 
						|
      RemapInstruction(NewI, VMap,
 | 
						|
                       RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
 | 
						|
      NewI->insertBefore(PBI);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  ++NumFoldBranchToCommonDest;
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Return if an instruction's type or any of its operands' types are a vector
 | 
						|
/// type.
 | 
						|
static bool isVectorOp(Instruction &I) {
 | 
						|
  return I.getType()->isVectorTy() || any_of(I.operands(), [](Use &U) {
 | 
						|
           return U->getType()->isVectorTy();
 | 
						|
         });
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
 | 
						|
/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
 | 
						|
/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
 | 
						|
bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
 | 
						|
                                  MemorySSAUpdater *MSSAU,
 | 
						|
                                  const TargetTransformInfo *TTI,
 | 
						|
                                  unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
 | 
						|
  // If this block ends with an unconditional branch,
 | 
						|
  // let SpeculativelyExecuteBB() deal with it.
 | 
						|
  if (!BI->isConditional())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  TargetTransformInfo::TargetCostKind CostKind =
 | 
						|
    BB->getParent()->hasMinSize() ? TargetTransformInfo::TCK_CodeSize
 | 
						|
                                  : TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!Cond ||
 | 
						|
      (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond) &&
 | 
						|
       !isa<SelectInst>(Cond)) ||
 | 
						|
      Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
 | 
						|
  if (is_contained(successors(BB), BB))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // With which predecessors will we want to deal with?
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds;
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *PredBlock : predecessors(BB)) {
 | 
						|
    BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Check that we have two conditional branches.  If there is a PHI node in
 | 
						|
    // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
 | 
						|
    // blocks.
 | 
						|
    if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() || !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI))
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
 | 
						|
    Instruction::BinaryOps Opc;
 | 
						|
    bool InvertPredCond;
 | 
						|
    if (auto Recipe = shouldFoldCondBranchesToCommonDestination(BI, PBI, TTI))
 | 
						|
      std::tie(Opc, InvertPredCond) = *Recipe;
 | 
						|
    else
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Check the cost of inserting the necessary logic before performing the
 | 
						|
    // transformation.
 | 
						|
    if (TTI) {
 | 
						|
      Type *Ty = BI->getCondition()->getType();
 | 
						|
      InstructionCost Cost = TTI->getArithmeticInstrCost(Opc, Ty, CostKind);
 | 
						|
      if (InvertPredCond && (!PBI->getCondition()->hasOneUse() ||
 | 
						|
          !isa<CmpInst>(PBI->getCondition())))
 | 
						|
        Cost += TTI->getArithmeticInstrCost(Instruction::Xor, Ty, CostKind);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (Cost > BranchFoldThreshold)
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Ok, we do want to deal with this predecessor. Record it.
 | 
						|
    Preds.emplace_back(PredBlock);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If there aren't any predecessors into which we can fold,
 | 
						|
  // don't bother checking the cost.
 | 
						|
  if (Preds.empty())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
 | 
						|
  // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
 | 
						|
  // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
 | 
						|
  // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
 | 
						|
  // number of the bonus instructions we'll need to create when cloning into
 | 
						|
  // each predecessor does not exceed a certain threshold.
 | 
						|
  unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
 | 
						|
  bool SawVectorOp = false;
 | 
						|
  const unsigned PredCount = Preds.size();
 | 
						|
  for (Instruction &I : *BB) {
 | 
						|
    // Don't check the branch condition comparison itself.
 | 
						|
    if (&I == Cond)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    // Ignore dbg intrinsics, and the terminator.
 | 
						|
    if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) || isa<BranchInst>(I))
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    // I must be safe to execute unconditionally.
 | 
						|
    if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&I))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    SawVectorOp |= isVectorOp(I);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Account for the cost of duplicating this instruction into each
 | 
						|
    // predecessor. Ignore free instructions.
 | 
						|
    if (!TTI || TTI->getInstructionCost(&I, CostKind) !=
 | 
						|
                    TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Free) {
 | 
						|
      NumBonusInsts += PredCount;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Early exits once we reach the limit.
 | 
						|
      if (NumBonusInsts >
 | 
						|
          BonusInstThreshold * BranchFoldToCommonDestVectorMultiplier)
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    auto IsBCSSAUse = [BB, &I](Use &U) {
 | 
						|
      auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
 | 
						|
      if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI))
 | 
						|
        return PN->getIncomingBlock(U) == BB;
 | 
						|
      return UI->getParent() == BB && I.comesBefore(UI);
 | 
						|
    };
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Does this instruction require rewriting of uses?
 | 
						|
    if (!all_of(I.uses(), IsBCSSAUse))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (NumBonusInsts >
 | 
						|
      BonusInstThreshold *
 | 
						|
          (SawVectorOp ? BranchFoldToCommonDestVectorMultiplier : 1))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Ok, we have the budget. Perform the transformation.
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *PredBlock : Preds) {
 | 
						|
    auto *PBI = cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
 | 
						|
    return performBranchToCommonDestFolding(BI, PBI, DTU, MSSAU, TTI);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
 | 
						|
// nullptr.
 | 
						|
static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
 | 
						|
  StoreInst *S = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
 | 
						|
    if (!BB)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    for (auto &I : *BB)
 | 
						|
      if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
 | 
						|
        if (S)
 | 
						|
          // Multiple stores seen.
 | 
						|
          return nullptr;
 | 
						|
        else
 | 
						|
          S = SI;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return S;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
 | 
						|
                                              Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
 | 
						|
  // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
 | 
						|
  // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
 | 
						|
  // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
 | 
						|
  // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
 | 
						|
  // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
 | 
						|
  // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
 | 
						|
  // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
 | 
						|
  // one.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
 | 
						|
  // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
 | 
						|
  // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
 | 
						|
  PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
 | 
						|
    if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
 | 
						|
      PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
 | 
						|
      if (!AlternativeV)
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      assert(Succ->hasNPredecessors(2));
 | 
						|
      auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
 | 
						|
      BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
 | 
						|
      if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      PHI = nullptr;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  if (PHI)
 | 
						|
    return PHI;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
 | 
						|
  if (!AlternativeV &&
 | 
						|
      (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
 | 
						|
    return V;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
 | 
						|
  PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
 | 
						|
    if (PredBB != BB)
 | 
						|
      PHI->addIncoming(
 | 
						|
          AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
 | 
						|
  return PHI;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB, BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address, bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
 | 
						|
    DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
 | 
						|
  // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
 | 
						|
  // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
 | 
						|
  // testing.
 | 
						|
  StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
 | 
						|
  StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
 | 
						|
  if (!PStore || !QStore)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Now check the stores are compatible.
 | 
						|
  if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered() ||
 | 
						|
      PStore->getValueOperand()->getType() !=
 | 
						|
          QStore->getValueOperand()->getType())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
 | 
						|
  // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
 | 
						|
  // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
 | 
						|
  // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
 | 
						|
  // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
 | 
						|
  // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
 | 
						|
  // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
 | 
						|
  // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
 | 
						|
  // check there are no other memory operations at all.
 | 
						|
  for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
 | 
						|
    if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  for (auto &I : *QFB)
 | 
						|
    if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  if (QTB)
 | 
						|
    for (auto &I : *QTB)
 | 
						|
      if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
  for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
 | 
						|
       I != E; ++I)
 | 
						|
    if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
 | 
						|
  // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
 | 
						|
  auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB, ArrayRef<StoreInst *> FreeStores) {
 | 
						|
    if (!BB)
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
 | 
						|
    // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
 | 
						|
    // thread this store.
 | 
						|
    InstructionCost Cost = 0;
 | 
						|
    InstructionCost Budget =
 | 
						|
        PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
 | 
						|
    for (auto &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(false)) {
 | 
						|
      // Consider terminator instruction to be free.
 | 
						|
      if (I.isTerminator())
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      // If this is one the stores that we want to speculate out of this BB,
 | 
						|
      // then don't count it's cost, consider it to be free.
 | 
						|
      if (auto *S = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
 | 
						|
        if (llvm::find(FreeStores, S))
 | 
						|
          continue;
 | 
						|
      // Else, we have a white-list of instructions that we are ak speculating.
 | 
						|
      if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(I) && !isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I))
 | 
						|
        return false; // Not in white-list - not worthwhile folding.
 | 
						|
      // And finally, if this is a non-free instruction that we are okay
 | 
						|
      // speculating, ensure that we consider the speculation budget.
 | 
						|
      Cost +=
 | 
						|
          TTI.getInstructionCost(&I, TargetTransformInfo::TCK_SizeAndLatency);
 | 
						|
      if (Cost > Budget)
 | 
						|
        return false; // Eagerly refuse to fold as soon as we're out of budget.
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    assert(Cost <= Budget &&
 | 
						|
           "When we run out of budget we will eagerly return from within the "
 | 
						|
           "per-instruction loop.");
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const std::array<StoreInst *, 2> FreeStores = {PStore, QStore};
 | 
						|
  if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
 | 
						|
      (!IsWorthwhile(PTB, FreeStores) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB, FreeStores) ||
 | 
						|
       !IsWorthwhile(QTB, FreeStores) || !IsWorthwhile(QFB, FreeStores)))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If PostBB has more than two predecessors, we need to split it so we can
 | 
						|
  // sink the store.
 | 
						|
  if (std::next(pred_begin(PostBB), 2) != pred_end(PostBB)) {
 | 
						|
    // We know that QFB's only successor is PostBB. And QFB has a single
 | 
						|
    // predecessor. If QTB exists, then its only successor is also PostBB.
 | 
						|
    // If QTB does not exist, then QFB's only predecessor has a conditional
 | 
						|
    // branch to QFB and PostBB.
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *TruePred = QTB ? QTB : QFB->getSinglePredecessor();
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *NewBB =
 | 
						|
        SplitBlockPredecessors(PostBB, {QFB, TruePred}, "condstore.split", DTU);
 | 
						|
    if (!NewBB)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    PostBB = NewBB;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
 | 
						|
  // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
 | 
						|
  Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
 | 
						|
                     ->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
 | 
						|
                     ->getCondition();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
 | 
						|
                                                PStore->getParent());
 | 
						|
  Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
 | 
						|
                                                QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
 | 
						|
  Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (InvertPCond)
 | 
						|
    PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
 | 
						|
  if (InvertQCond)
 | 
						|
    QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
 | 
						|
  Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  auto *T = SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(),
 | 
						|
                                      /*Unreachable=*/false,
 | 
						|
                                      /*BranchWeights=*/nullptr, DTU);
 | 
						|
  QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
 | 
						|
  StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
 | 
						|
  SI->setAAMetadata(PStore->getAAMetadata().merge(QStore->getAAMetadata()));
 | 
						|
  // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
 | 
						|
  // could use biggest one.  In this case, though, we only know that one of the
 | 
						|
  // stores executes.  And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
 | 
						|
  // store that doesn't execute.
 | 
						|
  SI->setAlignment(std::min(PStore->getAlign(), QStore->getAlign()));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  QStore->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
  PStore->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
 | 
						|
                                   DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
 | 
						|
                                   const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
 | 
						|
  // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
 | 
						|
  // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
 | 
						|
  // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
 | 
						|
  // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
 | 
						|
  // PBI and QBI.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
 | 
						|
  // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
 | 
						|
  // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
 | 
						|
  // sequences can be if-converted away.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  //     PBI       or      PBI        or a combination of the two
 | 
						|
  //    /   \               | \
 | 
						|
  //   PTB  PFB             |  PFB
 | 
						|
  //    \   /               | /
 | 
						|
  //     QBI                QBI
 | 
						|
  //    /  \                | \
 | 
						|
  //   QTB  QFB             |  QFB
 | 
						|
  //    \  /                | /
 | 
						|
  //    PostBB            PostBB
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
 | 
						|
  // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
 | 
						|
  // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
 | 
						|
  // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
 | 
						|
  if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
 | 
						|
    PostBB = QFB;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
 | 
						|
  if (!PostBB)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
 | 
						|
  // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
 | 
						|
  if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
 | 
						|
    std::swap(PFB, PTB);
 | 
						|
    InvertPCond = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (QFB == PostBB) {
 | 
						|
    std::swap(QFB, QTB);
 | 
						|
    InvertQCond = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
 | 
						|
  // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
 | 
						|
  if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
 | 
						|
    PTB = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  if (QTB == PostBB)
 | 
						|
    QTB = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
 | 
						|
  // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
 | 
						|
  // predecessor.
 | 
						|
  auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
 | 
						|
    return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
  if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
 | 
						|
      !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
 | 
						|
      (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  if (!QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
 | 
						|
  // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
 | 
						|
  SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
 | 
						|
  for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
 | 
						|
    if (!BB)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    for (auto &I : *BB)
 | 
						|
      if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
 | 
						|
        PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
 | 
						|
    if (!BB)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    for (auto &I : *BB)
 | 
						|
      if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
 | 
						|
        QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
 | 
						|
  // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
 | 
						|
  // clear what it contains.
 | 
						|
  auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool Changed = false;
 | 
						|
  for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
 | 
						|
    Changed |=
 | 
						|
        mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address,
 | 
						|
                                       InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DTU, DL, TTI);
 | 
						|
  return Changed;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If the previous block ended with a widenable branch, determine if reusing
 | 
						|
/// the target block is profitable and legal.  This will have the effect of
 | 
						|
/// "widening" PBI, but doesn't require us to reason about hosting safety.
 | 
						|
static bool tryWidenCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
 | 
						|
                                           DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
 | 
						|
  // TODO: This can be generalized in two important ways:
 | 
						|
  // 1) We can allow phi nodes in IfFalseBB and simply reuse all the input
 | 
						|
  //    values from the PBI edge.
 | 
						|
  // 2) We can sink side effecting instructions into BI's fallthrough
 | 
						|
  //    successor provided they doesn't contribute to computation of
 | 
						|
  //    BI's condition.
 | 
						|
  Value *CondWB, *WC;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *IfTrueBB, *IfFalseBB;
 | 
						|
  if (!parseWidenableBranch(PBI, CondWB, WC, IfTrueBB, IfFalseBB) ||
 | 
						|
      IfTrueBB != BI->getParent() || !BI->getParent()->getSinglePredecessor())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  if (!IfFalseBB->phis().empty())
 | 
						|
    return false; // TODO
 | 
						|
  // Use lambda to lazily compute expensive condition after cheap ones.
 | 
						|
  auto NoSideEffects = [](BasicBlock &BB) {
 | 
						|
    return llvm::none_of(BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
 | 
						|
        return I.mayWriteToMemory() || I.mayHaveSideEffects();
 | 
						|
      });
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
  if (BI->getSuccessor(1) != IfFalseBB && // no inf looping
 | 
						|
      BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminatingDeoptimizeCall() && // profitability
 | 
						|
      NoSideEffects(*BI->getParent())) {
 | 
						|
    auto *OldSuccessor = BI->getSuccessor(1);
 | 
						|
    OldSuccessor->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
 | 
						|
    BI->setSuccessor(1, IfFalseBB);
 | 
						|
    if (DTU)
 | 
						|
      DTU->applyUpdates(
 | 
						|
          {{DominatorTree::Insert, BI->getParent(), IfFalseBB},
 | 
						|
           {DominatorTree::Delete, BI->getParent(), OldSuccessor}});
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (BI->getSuccessor(0) != IfFalseBB && // no inf looping
 | 
						|
      BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminatingDeoptimizeCall() && // profitability
 | 
						|
      NoSideEffects(*BI->getParent())) {
 | 
						|
    auto *OldSuccessor = BI->getSuccessor(0);
 | 
						|
    OldSuccessor->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
 | 
						|
    BI->setSuccessor(0, IfFalseBB);
 | 
						|
    if (DTU)
 | 
						|
      DTU->applyUpdates(
 | 
						|
          {{DominatorTree::Insert, BI->getParent(), IfFalseBB},
 | 
						|
           {DominatorTree::Delete, BI->getParent(), OldSuccessor}});
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
 | 
						|
/// this function tries to simplify it.  We know
 | 
						|
/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
 | 
						|
/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
 | 
						|
static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
 | 
						|
                                           DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
 | 
						|
                                           const DataLayout &DL,
 | 
						|
                                           const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
 | 
						|
  // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
 | 
						|
  // this conditional branch redundant.
 | 
						|
  if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
 | 
						|
      PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
 | 
						|
    // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
 | 
						|
    // knowable.  If this block had a single pred, handle specially, otherwise
 | 
						|
    // FoldCondBranchOnValueKnownInPredecessor() will handle it.
 | 
						|
    if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
 | 
						|
      // Turn this into a branch on constant.
 | 
						|
      bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
 | 
						|
      BI->setCondition(
 | 
						|
          ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
 | 
						|
      return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the previous block ended with a widenable branch, determine if reusing
 | 
						|
  // the target block is profitable and legal.  This will have the effect of
 | 
						|
  // "widening" PBI, but doesn't require us to reason about hosting safety.
 | 
						|
  if (tryWidenCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DTU))
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
 | 
						|
  // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
 | 
						|
  // merged store at the end.
 | 
						|
  if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
 | 
						|
  // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
 | 
						|
  // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
 | 
						|
  if (&*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(false).begin() != BI)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  int PBIOp, BIOp;
 | 
						|
  if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
 | 
						|
    PBIOp = 0;
 | 
						|
    BIOp = 0;
 | 
						|
  } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
 | 
						|
    PBIOp = 0;
 | 
						|
    BIOp = 1;
 | 
						|
  } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
 | 
						|
    PBIOp = 1;
 | 
						|
    BIOp = 0;
 | 
						|
  } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
 | 
						|
    PBIOp = 1;
 | 
						|
    BIOp = 1;
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
 | 
						|
  // isn't BB itself.  If so, this is an infinite loop that will
 | 
						|
  // keep getting unwound.
 | 
						|
  if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
 | 
						|
  // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
 | 
						|
  // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *RemovedDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp ^ 1);
 | 
						|
  unsigned NumPhis = 0;
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
 | 
						|
       ++II, ++NumPhis) {
 | 
						|
    if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
 | 
						|
                    << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 5> Updates;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
 | 
						|
  // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
 | 
						|
  // exits.  We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
 | 
						|
  // (even though that seems likely).  If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
 | 
						|
  // recursively unpeeling the loop.  Since we know that (after the xform is
 | 
						|
  // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
 | 
						|
  // infinite loop with no cond branch.
 | 
						|
  if (OtherDest == BB) {
 | 
						|
    // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
 | 
						|
    // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
 | 
						|
        BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
 | 
						|
    BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
 | 
						|
    if (DTU)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock});
 | 
						|
    OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // BI may have other predecessors.  Because of this, we leave
 | 
						|
  // it alone, but modify PBI.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
 | 
						|
  Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
 | 
						|
  if (PBIOp)
 | 
						|
    PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  if (BIOp)
 | 
						|
    BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Merge the conditions.
 | 
						|
  Value *Cond =
 | 
						|
      createLogicalOp(Builder, Instruction::Or, PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
 | 
						|
  PBI->setCondition(Cond);
 | 
						|
  PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
 | 
						|
  PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
    Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, PBI->getParent(), OtherDest});
 | 
						|
    Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PBI->getParent(), RemovedDest});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Update branch weight for PBI.
 | 
						|
  uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
 | 
						|
  uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
 | 
						|
  bool HasWeights =
 | 
						|
      extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
 | 
						|
                             SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
 | 
						|
  if (HasWeights) {
 | 
						|
    PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
 | 
						|
    PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
 | 
						|
    SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
 | 
						|
    SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
 | 
						|
    // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
 | 
						|
    //                                    PredOther * SuccCommon.
 | 
						|
    // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
 | 
						|
    uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
 | 
						|
                                  PredOther * SuccCommon,
 | 
						|
                              PredOther * SuccOther};
 | 
						|
    // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
 | 
						|
    FitWeights(NewWeights);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // OtherDest may have phi nodes.  If so, add an entry from PBI's
 | 
						|
  // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
 | 
						|
  AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
 | 
						|
  // it.  If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
 | 
						|
  // entries for BB and PBI's BB.  If so, insert a select to make
 | 
						|
  // them agree.
 | 
						|
  for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
 | 
						|
    Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
 | 
						|
    unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
 | 
						|
    Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
 | 
						|
    if (BIV != PBIV) {
 | 
						|
      // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
 | 
						|
      SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
 | 
						|
          Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
 | 
						|
      PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
 | 
						|
      // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
 | 
						|
      // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
 | 
						|
      // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
 | 
						|
      // the outgoing edges of PBI.
 | 
						|
      if (HasWeights) {
 | 
						|
        uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
 | 
						|
        uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
 | 
						|
        uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
 | 
						|
        uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
 | 
						|
        // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
 | 
						|
        // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
 | 
						|
        uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
 | 
						|
                                  PredOther * SuccCommon};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        FitWeights(NewWeights);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
 | 
						|
  LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // This basic block is probably dead.  We know it has at least
 | 
						|
  // one fewer predecessor.
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
 | 
						|
// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
 | 
						|
// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
 | 
						|
// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
 | 
						|
// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(Instruction *OldTerm,
 | 
						|
                                                Value *Cond, BasicBlock *TrueBB,
 | 
						|
                                                BasicBlock *FalseBB,
 | 
						|
                                                uint32_t TrueWeight,
 | 
						|
                                                uint32_t FalseWeight) {
 | 
						|
  auto *BB = OldTerm->getParent();
 | 
						|
  // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
 | 
						|
  // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
 | 
						|
  // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
 | 
						|
  // successor.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 2> RemovedSuccessors;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Then remove the rest.
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(OldTerm)) {
 | 
						|
    // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
 | 
						|
    if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
 | 
						|
      KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
 | 
						|
    else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
 | 
						|
      KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
 | 
						|
    else {
 | 
						|
      Succ->removePredecessor(BB,
 | 
						|
                              /*KeepOneInputPHIs=*/true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (Succ != TrueBB && Succ != FalseBB)
 | 
						|
        RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
 | 
						|
  Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
 | 
						|
  if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
 | 
						|
    if (TrueBB == FalseBB) {
 | 
						|
      // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
 | 
						|
      // Create an unconditional branch to it.
 | 
						|
      Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
 | 
						|
      // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
 | 
						|
      BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
 | 
						|
      if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
 | 
						|
        setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
 | 
						|
    // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
 | 
						|
    // terminator must be unreachable.
 | 
						|
    new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
 | 
						|
    // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
 | 
						|
    // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
 | 
						|
    if (!KeepEdge1) {
 | 
						|
      // Only TrueBB was found.
 | 
						|
      Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      // Only FalseBB was found.
 | 
						|
      Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(OldTerm);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
    SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
 | 
						|
    Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccessors.size());
 | 
						|
    for (auto *RemovedSuccessor : RemovedSuccessors)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, RemovedSuccessor});
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Replaces
 | 
						|
//   (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
 | 
						|
// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
 | 
						|
// unconditional otherwise.
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI,
 | 
						|
                                            SelectInst *Select) {
 | 
						|
  // Check for constant integer values in the select.
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
 | 
						|
  if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
 | 
						|
  Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
 | 
						|
  uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
 | 
						|
  bool HasWeights = hasBranchWeightMD(*SI);
 | 
						|
  if (HasWeights) {
 | 
						|
    GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
 | 
						|
    if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
 | 
						|
      TrueWeight =
 | 
						|
          (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
 | 
						|
      FalseWeight =
 | 
						|
          (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Perform the actual simplification.
 | 
						|
  return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
 | 
						|
                                    FalseWeight);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Replaces
 | 
						|
//   (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
 | 
						|
//                             blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
 | 
						|
// with
 | 
						|
//   (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI,
 | 
						|
                                                SelectInst *SI) {
 | 
						|
  // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
 | 
						|
  BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
 | 
						|
  BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
 | 
						|
  if (!TBA || !FBA)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Extract the actual blocks.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Perform the actual simplification.
 | 
						|
  return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
 | 
						|
                                    0);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
 | 
						|
/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
 | 
						|
/// block that ends with an uncond branch.  We are looking for a very specific
 | 
						|
/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified.  In
 | 
						|
/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
 | 
						|
/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
 | 
						|
/// like:
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
///   switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end    i8 2, label %end ]
 | 
						|
/// DEFAULT:
 | 
						|
///   %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
 | 
						|
///   br label %end
 | 
						|
/// end:
 | 
						|
///   ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
 | 
						|
/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
 | 
						|
    ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
 | 
						|
  // complex.
 | 
						|
  if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
 | 
						|
  // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch.  In this case we can
 | 
						|
  // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
 | 
						|
  if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
 | 
						|
  if (SI->getCondition() != V)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
 | 
						|
  // V in this block.  Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
 | 
						|
  // away.
 | 
						|
  if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
 | 
						|
    assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
 | 
						|
    ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (Value *V = simplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
 | 
						|
      ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
 | 
						|
      ICI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest.  If the constant we're
 | 
						|
  // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
 | 
						|
  // and zap it.
 | 
						|
  if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
 | 
						|
    Value *V;
 | 
						|
    if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
 | 
						|
      V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
 | 
						|
    else
 | 
						|
      V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
 | 
						|
    ICI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
    // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
 | 
						|
  // the block.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
 | 
						|
  PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
 | 
						|
  if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
 | 
						|
      isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
 | 
						|
  // true in the PHI.
 | 
						|
  Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
 | 
						|
  Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
 | 
						|
    std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
 | 
						|
  // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
 | 
						|
  ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
 | 
						|
  ICI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value.  Add an edge from
 | 
						|
  // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *NewBB =
 | 
						|
      BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
 | 
						|
  {
 | 
						|
    SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SIW(*SI);
 | 
						|
    auto W0 = SIW.getSuccessorWeight(0);
 | 
						|
    SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper::CaseWeightOpt NewW;
 | 
						|
    if (W0) {
 | 
						|
      NewW = ((uint64_t(*W0) + 1) >> 1);
 | 
						|
      SIW.setSuccessorWeight(0, *NewW);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    SIW.addCase(Cst, NewBB, NewW);
 | 
						|
    if (DTU)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, NewBB});
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
 | 
						|
  Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
 | 
						|
  Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
 | 
						|
  Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
 | 
						|
  PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
 | 
						|
  if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
    Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, NewBB, SuccBlock});
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
 | 
						|
/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
 | 
						|
/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI,
 | 
						|
                                               IRBuilder<> &Builder,
 | 
						|
                                               const DataLayout &DL) {
 | 
						|
  Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
 | 
						|
  if (!Cond)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
 | 
						|
  // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
 | 
						|
  // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
 | 
						|
  ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
 | 
						|
  // Unpack the result
 | 
						|
  SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
 | 
						|
  Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
 | 
						|
  unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
 | 
						|
  Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
 | 
						|
  if (!CompVal)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
 | 
						|
  if (UsedICmps <= 1)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool TrueWhenEqual = match(Cond, m_LogicalOr(m_Value(), m_Value()));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
 | 
						|
  // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
 | 
						|
  array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
 | 
						|
  Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
 | 
						|
  // transformation.  A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
 | 
						|
  if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
 | 
						|
  // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Figure out which block is which destination.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
 | 
						|
  if (!TrueWhenEqual)
 | 
						|
    std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
 | 
						|
                    << " cases into SWITCH.  BB is:\n"
 | 
						|
                    << *BB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
 | 
						|
  // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
 | 
						|
  // right before the condbr to handle it.
 | 
						|
  if (ExtraCase) {
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *NewBB = SplitBlock(BB, BI, DTU, /*LI=*/nullptr,
 | 
						|
                                   /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, "switch.early.test");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
 | 
						|
    Instruction *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
 | 
						|
    Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // There can be an unintended UB if extra values are Poison. Before the
 | 
						|
    // transformation, extra values may not be evaluated according to the
 | 
						|
    // condition, and it will not raise UB. But after transformation, we are
 | 
						|
    // evaluating extra values before checking the condition, and it will raise
 | 
						|
    // UB. It can be solved by adding freeze instruction to extra values.
 | 
						|
    AssumptionCache *AC = Options.AC;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!isGuaranteedNotToBeUndefOrPoison(ExtraCase, AC, BI, nullptr))
 | 
						|
      ExtraCase = Builder.CreateFreeze(ExtraCase);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (TrueWhenEqual)
 | 
						|
      Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
 | 
						|
    else
 | 
						|
      Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    OldTI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (DTU)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, EdgeBB});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
 | 
						|
    // for the edge we just added.
 | 
						|
    AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "  ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
 | 
						|
                      << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
 | 
						|
    BB = NewBB;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
 | 
						|
  // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
 | 
						|
  if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
 | 
						|
    CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
 | 
						|
        CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Create the new switch instruction now.
 | 
						|
  SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
    New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB.  As such, if there were any
 | 
						|
  // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
 | 
						|
  // the number of edges added.
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
 | 
						|
    PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
 | 
						|
    Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
 | 
						|
    for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
      PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Erase the old branch instruction.
 | 
						|
  EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "  ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
 | 
						|
    return simplifyCommonResume(RI);
 | 
						|
  else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
 | 
						|
           RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
 | 
						|
    // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
 | 
						|
    return simplifySingleResume(RI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Check if cleanup block is empty
 | 
						|
static bool isCleanupBlockEmpty(iterator_range<BasicBlock::iterator> R) {
 | 
						|
  for (Instruction &I : R) {
 | 
						|
    auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(&I);
 | 
						|
    if (!II)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
 | 
						|
    switch (IntrinsicID) {
 | 
						|
    case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
 | 
						|
    case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
 | 
						|
    case Intrinsic::dbg_label:
 | 
						|
    case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug and lifetime
 | 
						|
  // intrinsics between the phi's and resume instruction.
 | 
						|
  if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
 | 
						|
          make_range(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI(), BB->getTerminator())))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
 | 
						|
  auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
 | 
						|
       Idx++) {
 | 
						|
    auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
 | 
						|
    auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
 | 
						|
    // it has other dependents.
 | 
						|
    if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
 | 
						|
    // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
 | 
						|
    if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (isCleanupBlockEmpty(
 | 
						|
            make_range(LandingPad->getNextNode(), IncomingBB->getTerminator())))
 | 
						|
      TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
 | 
						|
  if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
 | 
						|
  for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
 | 
						|
    // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
 | 
						|
    // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
 | 
						|
    // to remove them all.
 | 
						|
    while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
 | 
						|
      BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    for (BasicBlock *Pred :
 | 
						|
         llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(TrivialBB))) {
 | 
						|
      removeUnwindEdge(Pred, DTU);
 | 
						|
      ++NumInvokes;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
 | 
						|
    // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
 | 
						|
    // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
 | 
						|
    // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
 | 
						|
    // predecessors.
 | 
						|
    TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
    new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
 | 
						|
    if (DTU)
 | 
						|
      DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, TrivialBB, BB}});
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
 | 
						|
  if (pred_empty(BB))
 | 
						|
    DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  auto *LPInst = cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
 | 
						|
  assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
 | 
						|
         "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
 | 
						|
  if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
 | 
						|
          make_range<Instruction *>(LPInst->getNextNode(), RI)))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *Pred : llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(BB))) {
 | 
						|
    removeUnwindEdge(Pred, DTU);
 | 
						|
    ++NumInvokes;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The landingpad is now unreachable.  Zap it.
 | 
						|
  DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
 | 
						|
  // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
 | 
						|
  // eliminated.  If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
 | 
						|
  // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
 | 
						|
  // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
 | 
						|
  // instruction converted to a call instruction.  If the cleanup pad being
 | 
						|
  // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
 | 
						|
  // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
 | 
						|
  // simplified.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
 | 
						|
  if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
 | 
						|
    // This isn't an empty cleanup.
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses.  This typically arises
 | 
						|
  // from unreachable basic blocks.
 | 
						|
  if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
 | 
						|
  if (!isCleanupBlockEmpty(
 | 
						|
          make_range<Instruction *>(CPInst->getNextNode(), RI)))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
 | 
						|
  // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
 | 
						|
  Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We're about to remove BB from the control flow.  Before we do, sink any
 | 
						|
  // PHINodes into the unwind destination.  Doing this before changing the
 | 
						|
  // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
 | 
						|
  // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
 | 
						|
  // are both EH pads).
 | 
						|
  if (UnwindDest) {
 | 
						|
    // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
 | 
						|
    // reference the block we are removing
 | 
						|
    for (PHINode &DestPN : UnwindDest->phis()) {
 | 
						|
      int Idx = DestPN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
 | 
						|
      // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
 | 
						|
      assert(Idx != -1);
 | 
						|
      // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
 | 
						|
      // path through the cleanup pad we are removing.  If the incoming
 | 
						|
      // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
 | 
						|
      // verified above that the block is otherwise empty).  Otherwise, the
 | 
						|
      // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
 | 
						|
      // pad being removed.
 | 
						|
      //
 | 
						|
      // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
 | 
						|
      // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
 | 
						|
      // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
 | 
						|
      // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
 | 
						|
      Value *SrcVal = DestPN.getIncomingValue(Idx);
 | 
						|
      PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      bool NeedPHITranslation = SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB;
 | 
						|
      for (auto *Pred : predecessors(BB)) {
 | 
						|
        Value *Incoming =
 | 
						|
            NeedPHITranslation ? SrcPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred) : SrcVal;
 | 
						|
        DestPN.addIncoming(Incoming, Pred);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
 | 
						|
    Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
 | 
						|
    for (PHINode &PN : make_early_inc_range(BB->phis())) {
 | 
						|
      if (PN.use_empty() || !PN.isUsedOutsideOfBlock(BB))
 | 
						|
        // If the PHI node has no uses or all of its uses are in this basic
 | 
						|
        // block (meaning they are debug or lifetime intrinsics), just leave
 | 
						|
        // it.  It will be erased when we erase BB below.
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
 | 
						|
      // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
 | 
						|
      // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
 | 
						|
      // BB.  In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
 | 
						|
      for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
 | 
						|
        if (pred != BB)
 | 
						|
          PN.addIncoming(&PN, pred);
 | 
						|
      PN.moveBefore(InsertPt);
 | 
						|
      // Also, add a dummy incoming value for the original BB itself,
 | 
						|
      // so that the PHI is well-formed until we drop said predecessor.
 | 
						|
      PN.addIncoming(PoisonValue::get(PN.getType()), BB);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We use make_early_inc_range here because we will remove all predecessors.
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *PredBB : llvm::make_early_inc_range(predecessors(BB))) {
 | 
						|
    if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
 | 
						|
      if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
        DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
        Updates.clear();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      removeUnwindEdge(PredBB, DTU);
 | 
						|
      ++NumInvokes;
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
 | 
						|
      Instruction *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
 | 
						|
      TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
 | 
						|
      if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, PredBB, UnwindDest});
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, PredBB, BB});
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
 | 
						|
static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
 | 
						|
  // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
 | 
						|
  // with.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
 | 
						|
  if (!UnwindDest)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
 | 
						|
  // be safe to merge without code duplication.
 | 
						|
  if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
 | 
						|
  auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
 | 
						|
  if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
 | 
						|
  // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
 | 
						|
  // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
 | 
						|
  // funclet bundle operands.
 | 
						|
  SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
 | 
						|
  // Remove the old cleanuppad.
 | 
						|
  SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
  // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
 | 
						|
  // destination.
 | 
						|
  BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
 | 
						|
  RI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
 | 
						|
  // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
 | 
						|
  // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
 | 
						|
  // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
 | 
						|
  if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI, DTU))
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// WARNING: keep in sync with InstCombinerImpl::visitUnreachableInst()!
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool Changed = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
 | 
						|
  // be removed, do so.
 | 
						|
  while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
 | 
						|
    --BBI;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!isGuaranteedToTransferExecutionToSuccessor(&*BBI))
 | 
						|
      break; // Can not drop any more instructions. We're done here.
 | 
						|
    // Otherwise, this instruction can be freely erased,
 | 
						|
    // even if it is not side-effect free.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Note that deleting EH's here is in fact okay, although it involves a bit
 | 
						|
    // of subtle reasoning. If this inst is an EH, all the predecessors of this
 | 
						|
    // block will be the unwind edges of Invoke/CatchSwitch/CleanupReturn,
 | 
						|
    // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
 | 
						|
    BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(PoisonValue::get(BBI->getType()));
 | 
						|
    BBI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
    Changed = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
 | 
						|
  // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
 | 
						|
  if (&BB->front() != UI)
 | 
						|
    return Changed;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
 | 
						|
    auto *Predecessor = Preds[i];
 | 
						|
    Instruction *TI = Predecessor->getTerminator();
 | 
						|
    IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
 | 
						|
    if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
      // We could either have a proper unconditional branch,
 | 
						|
      // or a degenerate conditional branch with matching destinations.
 | 
						|
      if (all_of(BI->successors(),
 | 
						|
                 [BB](auto *Successor) { return Successor == BB; })) {
 | 
						|
        new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
 | 
						|
        TI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
        Changed = true;
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        assert(BI->isConditional() && "Can't get here with an uncond branch.");
 | 
						|
        Value* Cond = BI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
        assert(BI->getSuccessor(0) != BI->getSuccessor(1) &&
 | 
						|
               "The destinations are guaranteed to be different here.");
 | 
						|
        if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
 | 
						|
          Builder.CreateAssumption(Builder.CreateNot(Cond));
 | 
						|
          Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
 | 
						|
        } else {
 | 
						|
          assert(BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB && "Incorrect CFG");
 | 
						|
          Builder.CreateAssumption(Cond);
 | 
						|
          Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
 | 
						|
        Changed = true;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if (DTU)
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
 | 
						|
    } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
      SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SU(*SI);
 | 
						|
      for (auto i = SU->case_begin(), e = SU->case_end(); i != e;) {
 | 
						|
        if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
 | 
						|
          ++i;
 | 
						|
          continue;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        BB->removePredecessor(SU->getParent());
 | 
						|
        i = SU.removeCase(i);
 | 
						|
        e = SU->case_end();
 | 
						|
        Changed = true;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      // Note that the default destination can't be removed!
 | 
						|
      if (DTU && SI->getDefaultDest() != BB)
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
 | 
						|
    } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
      if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
 | 
						|
        if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
          DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
          Updates.clear();
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent(), DTU);
 | 
						|
        Changed = true;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
      if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
 | 
						|
        if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
          DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
          Updates.clear();
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent(), DTU);
 | 
						|
        Changed = true;
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
 | 
						|
                                             E = CSI->handler_end();
 | 
						|
           I != E; ++I) {
 | 
						|
        if (*I == BB) {
 | 
						|
          CSI->removeHandler(I);
 | 
						|
          --I;
 | 
						|
          --E;
 | 
						|
          Changed = true;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if (DTU)
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
 | 
						|
      if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
 | 
						|
        if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
 | 
						|
          // Redirect all predecessors of the block containing CatchSwitchInst
 | 
						|
          // to instead branch to the CatchSwitchInst's unwind destination.
 | 
						|
          if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
            for (auto *PredecessorOfPredecessor : predecessors(Predecessor)) {
 | 
						|
              Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert,
 | 
						|
                                 PredecessorOfPredecessor,
 | 
						|
                                 CSI->getUnwindDest()});
 | 
						|
              Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete,
 | 
						|
                                 PredecessorOfPredecessor, Predecessor});
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          Predecessor->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
 | 
						|
        } else {
 | 
						|
          // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
 | 
						|
          if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
            DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
            Updates.clear();
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(Predecessor));
 | 
						|
          for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
 | 
						|
            removeUnwindEdge(EHPred, DTU);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
 | 
						|
        new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
 | 
						|
        CSI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
        Changed = true;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } else if (auto *CRI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
 | 
						|
      (void)CRI;
 | 
						|
      assert(CRI->hasUnwindDest() && CRI->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
 | 
						|
             "Expected to always have an unwind to BB.");
 | 
						|
      if (DTU)
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB});
 | 
						|
      new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
 | 
						|
      TI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
      Changed = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If this block is now dead, remove it.
 | 
						|
  if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
 | 
						|
    DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return Changed;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
 | 
						|
  assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
 | 
						|
  for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
 | 
						|
    if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static void createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SwitchInst *Switch,
 | 
						|
                                           DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
 | 
						|
  LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
 | 
						|
  auto *BB = Switch->getParent();
 | 
						|
  auto *OrigDefaultBlock = Switch->getDefaultDest();
 | 
						|
  OrigDefaultBlock->removePredecessor(BB);
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *NewDefaultBlock = BasicBlock::Create(
 | 
						|
      BB->getContext(), BB->getName() + ".unreachabledefault", BB->getParent(),
 | 
						|
      OrigDefaultBlock);
 | 
						|
  new UnreachableInst(Switch->getContext(), NewDefaultBlock);
 | 
						|
  Switch->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefaultBlock);
 | 
						|
  if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
    SmallVector<DominatorTree::UpdateType, 2> Updates;
 | 
						|
    Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, &*NewDefaultBlock});
 | 
						|
    if (!is_contained(successors(BB), OrigDefaultBlock))
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, &*OrigDefaultBlock});
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Turn a switch into an integer range comparison and branch.
 | 
						|
/// Switches with more than 2 destinations are ignored.
 | 
						|
/// Switches with 1 destination are also ignored.
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI,
 | 
						|
                                             IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool HasDefault =
 | 
						|
      !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  auto *BB = SI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
 | 
						|
    if (!DestA)
 | 
						|
      DestA = Dest;
 | 
						|
    if (Dest == DestA) {
 | 
						|
      CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (!DestB)
 | 
						|
      DestB = Dest;
 | 
						|
    if (Dest == DestB) {
 | 
						|
      CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    return false; // More than two destinations.
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (!DestB)
 | 
						|
    return false; // All destinations are the same and the default is unreachable
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  assert(DestA && DestB &&
 | 
						|
         "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
 | 
						|
  assert(DestA != DestB);
 | 
						|
  assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
 | 
						|
  assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
 | 
						|
  assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
 | 
						|
  SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
 | 
						|
    ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
 | 
						|
    ContiguousDest = DestA;
 | 
						|
    OtherDest = DestB;
 | 
						|
  } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
 | 
						|
    ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
 | 
						|
    ContiguousDest = DestB;
 | 
						|
    OtherDest = DestA;
 | 
						|
  } else
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Start building the compare and branch.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
 | 
						|
  Constant *NumCases =
 | 
						|
      ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  if (!Offset->isNullValue())
 | 
						|
    Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Value *Cmp;
 | 
						|
  // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
 | 
						|
  if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
 | 
						|
    Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
 | 
						|
  else
 | 
						|
    Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
 | 
						|
  BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
 | 
						|
  if (hasBranchWeightMD(*SI)) {
 | 
						|
    SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
 | 
						|
    GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
 | 
						|
    if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
 | 
						|
      uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
 | 
						|
      uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
 | 
						|
      for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
 | 
						|
        if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
 | 
						|
          TrueWeight += Weights[I];
 | 
						|
        else
 | 
						|
          FalseWeight += Weights[I];
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
 | 
						|
        TrueWeight /= 2;
 | 
						|
        FalseWeight /= 2;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
 | 
						|
  for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
 | 
						|
    unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
 | 
						|
    if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
 | 
						|
      ++PreviousEdges;
 | 
						|
    for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
 | 
						|
      cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
 | 
						|
    unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
 | 
						|
    if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
 | 
						|
      ++PreviousEdges;
 | 
						|
    for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
 | 
						|
      cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Clean up the default block - it may have phis or other instructions before
 | 
						|
  // the unreachable terminator.
 | 
						|
  if (!HasDefault)
 | 
						|
    createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SI, DTU);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  auto *UnreachableDefault = SI->getDefaultDest();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Drop the switch.
 | 
						|
  SI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!HasDefault && DTU)
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, BB, UnreachableDefault}});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
 | 
						|
/// and use it to remove dead cases.
 | 
						|
static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, DomTreeUpdater *DTU,
 | 
						|
                                     AssumptionCache *AC,
 | 
						|
                                     const DataLayout &DL) {
 | 
						|
  Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
 | 
						|
  // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
 | 
						|
  // bits are in the condition value.
 | 
						|
  unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond =
 | 
						|
      ComputeMaxSignificantBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Gather dead cases.
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
 | 
						|
  SmallDenseMap<BasicBlock *, int, 8> NumPerSuccessorCases;
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UniqueSuccessors;
 | 
						|
  for (const auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
 | 
						|
    auto *Successor = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
 | 
						|
    if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
      if (!NumPerSuccessorCases.count(Successor))
 | 
						|
        UniqueSuccessors.push_back(Successor);
 | 
						|
      ++NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
 | 
						|
    if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
 | 
						|
        (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
 | 
						|
      DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
 | 
						|
      if (DTU)
 | 
						|
        --NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor];
 | 
						|
      LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal
 | 
						|
                        << " is dead.\n");
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
 | 
						|
  // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it.  If we know some
 | 
						|
  // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
 | 
						|
  // number of possible unique case values.
 | 
						|
  bool HasDefault =
 | 
						|
      !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
 | 
						|
  const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
 | 
						|
      Known.getBitWidth() - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
 | 
						|
  assert(NumUnknownBits <= Known.getBitWidth());
 | 
						|
  if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
 | 
						|
      NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
 | 
						|
      SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
 | 
						|
    createUnreachableSwitchDefault(SI, DTU);
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DeadCases.empty())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper SIW(*SI);
 | 
						|
  for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
 | 
						|
    SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
 | 
						|
    assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
 | 
						|
           "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
 | 
						|
    // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
 | 
						|
    CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
 | 
						|
    SIW.removeCase(CaseI);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
    std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
 | 
						|
    for (auto *Successor : UniqueSuccessors)
 | 
						|
      if (NumPerSuccessorCases[Successor] == 0)
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, SI->getParent(), Successor});
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
 | 
						|
/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
 | 
						|
/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
 | 
						|
/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
 | 
						|
/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
 | 
						|
static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
 | 
						|
                                              BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
 | 
						|
  if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
 | 
						|
    return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
 | 
						|
  if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
 | 
						|
    return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
 | 
						|
  if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
 | 
						|
    return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
 | 
						|
    int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
 | 
						|
    assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
 | 
						|
    if (InValue != CaseValue)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    *PhiIndex = Idx;
 | 
						|
    return &PHI;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return nullptr;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
 | 
						|
/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
 | 
						|
/// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
 | 
						|
static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
 | 
						|
  using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  bool Changed = false;
 | 
						|
  for (const auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
 | 
						|
    // value rather than the switch condition variable:
 | 
						|
    //   switchbb:
 | 
						|
    //   switch i32 %x, label %default [
 | 
						|
    //     i32 17, label %succ
 | 
						|
    //   ...
 | 
						|
    //   succ:
 | 
						|
    //     %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
 | 
						|
    // -->
 | 
						|
    //     %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
 | 
						|
      // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
 | 
						|
      // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
 | 
						|
      // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
 | 
						|
      // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
 | 
						|
      // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
 | 
						|
      int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
 | 
						|
      if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
 | 
						|
          count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
 | 
						|
        Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
 | 
						|
        Changed = true;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
 | 
						|
    int PhiIdx;
 | 
						|
    if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
 | 
						|
      ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
 | 
						|
    PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
 | 
						|
    SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
 | 
						|
    if (Indexes.size() < 2)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    for (int Index : Indexes)
 | 
						|
      Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
 | 
						|
    Changed = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return Changed;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
 | 
						|
/// initializing an array of constants like C.
 | 
						|
static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  if (C->isThreadDependent())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
 | 
						|
      !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
 | 
						|
      !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
 | 
						|
    // Pointer casts and in-bounds GEPs will not prohibit the backend from
 | 
						|
    // materializing the array of constants.
 | 
						|
    Constant *StrippedC = cast<Constant>(CE->stripInBoundsConstantOffsets());
 | 
						|
    if (StrippedC == C || !ValidLookupTableConstant(StrippedC, TTI))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
 | 
						|
/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
 | 
						|
static Constant *
 | 
						|
LookupConstant(Value *V,
 | 
						|
               const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
 | 
						|
  if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
 | 
						|
    return C;
 | 
						|
  return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
 | 
						|
/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
 | 
						|
/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
 | 
						|
/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
 | 
						|
static Constant *
 | 
						|
ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
 | 
						|
             const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
 | 
						|
  if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
 | 
						|
    Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
 | 
						|
    if (!A)
 | 
						|
      return nullptr;
 | 
						|
    if (A->isAllOnesValue())
 | 
						|
      return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
 | 
						|
    if (A->isNullValue())
 | 
						|
      return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
 | 
						|
    if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
 | 
						|
      COps.push_back(A);
 | 
						|
    else
 | 
						|
      return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
 | 
						|
/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
 | 
						|
/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
 | 
						|
/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
 | 
						|
static bool
 | 
						|
getCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
 | 
						|
               BasicBlock **CommonDest,
 | 
						|
               SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
 | 
						|
               const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  // The block from which we enter the common destination.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
 | 
						|
  // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
 | 
						|
  SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
 | 
						|
  ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
 | 
						|
  for (Instruction &I : CaseDest->instructionsWithoutDebug(false)) {
 | 
						|
    if (I.isTerminator()) {
 | 
						|
      // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
 | 
						|
      if (I.getNumSuccessors() != 1 || I.isExceptionalTerminator())
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
      Pred = CaseDest;
 | 
						|
      CaseDest = I.getSuccessor(0);
 | 
						|
    } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
 | 
						|
      // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
 | 
						|
      // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
 | 
						|
      // no longer dominate all its uses.
 | 
						|
      for (auto &Use : I.uses()) {
 | 
						|
        User *User = Use.getUser();
 | 
						|
        if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
 | 
						|
          if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
 | 
						|
            continue;
 | 
						|
        if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
 | 
						|
          if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
 | 
						|
            continue;
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&I, C));
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
 | 
						|
  if (!*CommonDest)
 | 
						|
    *CommonDest = CaseDest;
 | 
						|
  // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
 | 
						|
  if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
 | 
						|
  for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
 | 
						|
    int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
 | 
						|
    if (Idx == -1)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Constant *ConstVal =
 | 
						|
        LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
 | 
						|
    if (!ConstVal)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
 | 
						|
    if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return Res.size() > 0;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
 | 
						|
// Result. Returns the updated number of cases that generate this result.
 | 
						|
static size_t mapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
 | 
						|
                              SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
 | 
						|
                              Constant *Result) {
 | 
						|
  for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
 | 
						|
    if (I.first == Result) {
 | 
						|
      I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
 | 
						|
      return I.second.size();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  UniqueResults.push_back(
 | 
						|
      std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
 | 
						|
  return 1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Helper function that initializes a map containing
 | 
						|
// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
 | 
						|
// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
 | 
						|
// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
 | 
						|
static bool initializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
 | 
						|
                                  BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
 | 
						|
                                  SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
 | 
						|
                                  Constant *&DefaultResult,
 | 
						|
                                  const DataLayout &DL,
 | 
						|
                                  const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
 | 
						|
                                  uintptr_t MaxUniqueResults) {
 | 
						|
  for (const auto &I : SI->cases()) {
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
 | 
						|
    SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
 | 
						|
    if (!getCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
 | 
						|
                        DL, TTI))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Only one value per case is permitted.
 | 
						|
    if (Results.size() > 1)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Add the case->result mapping to UniqueResults.
 | 
						|
    const size_t NumCasesForResult =
 | 
						|
        mapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Early out if there are too many cases for this result.
 | 
						|
    if (NumCasesForResult > MaxSwitchCasesPerResult)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Early out if there are too many unique results.
 | 
						|
    if (UniqueResults.size() > MaxUniqueResults)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Check the PHI consistency.
 | 
						|
    if (!PHI)
 | 
						|
      PHI = Results[0].first;
 | 
						|
    else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  // Find the default result value.
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
 | 
						|
  getCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
 | 
						|
                 DL, TTI);
 | 
						|
  // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
 | 
						|
  // is unreachable.
 | 
						|
  DefaultResult =
 | 
						|
      DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
 | 
						|
  if ((!DefaultResult &&
 | 
						|
       !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
 | 
						|
// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
 | 
						|
// TODO: Handle switches with more than 2 cases that map to the same result.
 | 
						|
static Value *foldSwitchToSelect(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
 | 
						|
                                 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
 | 
						|
                                 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
 | 
						|
  // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
 | 
						|
  // Example:
 | 
						|
  // switch (a) {                  %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
 | 
						|
  //   case 10: return 42;         %1 = select i1 %0, i32 42, i32 4
 | 
						|
  //   case 20: return 2;   ---->  %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
 | 
						|
  //   default: return 4;          %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
 | 
						|
  // }
 | 
						|
  if (ResultVector.size() == 2 && ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
 | 
						|
      ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
 | 
						|
    Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
 | 
						|
    if (DefaultResult) {
 | 
						|
      Value *ValueCompare =
 | 
						|
          Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
 | 
						|
      SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
 | 
						|
                                         DefaultResult, "switch.select");
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    Value *ValueCompare =
 | 
						|
        Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
 | 
						|
    return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
 | 
						|
                                SelectValue, "switch.select");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Handle the degenerate case where two cases have the same result value.
 | 
						|
  if (ResultVector.size() == 1 && DefaultResult) {
 | 
						|
    ArrayRef<ConstantInt *> CaseValues = ResultVector[0].second;
 | 
						|
    unsigned CaseCount = CaseValues.size();
 | 
						|
    // n bits group cases map to the same result:
 | 
						|
    // case 0,4      -> Cond & 0b1..1011 == 0 ? result : default
 | 
						|
    // case 0,2,4,6  -> Cond & 0b1..1001 == 0 ? result : default
 | 
						|
    // case 0,2,8,10 -> Cond & 0b1..0101 == 0 ? result : default
 | 
						|
    if (isPowerOf2_32(CaseCount)) {
 | 
						|
      ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CaseValues[0];
 | 
						|
      // Find mininal value.
 | 
						|
      for (auto Case : CaseValues)
 | 
						|
        if (Case->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
 | 
						|
          MinCaseVal = Case;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Mark the bits case number touched.
 | 
						|
      APInt BitMask = APInt::getZero(MinCaseVal->getBitWidth());
 | 
						|
      for (auto Case : CaseValues)
 | 
						|
        BitMask |= (Case->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Check if cases with the same result can cover all number
 | 
						|
      // in touched bits.
 | 
						|
      if (BitMask.countPopulation() == Log2_32(CaseCount)) {
 | 
						|
        if (!MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
 | 
						|
          Condition = Builder.CreateSub(Condition, MinCaseVal);
 | 
						|
        Value *And = Builder.CreateAnd(Condition, ~BitMask, "switch.and");
 | 
						|
        Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(
 | 
						|
            And, Constant::getNullValue(And->getType()), "switch.selectcmp");
 | 
						|
        return Builder.CreateSelect(Cmp, ResultVector[0].first, DefaultResult);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Handle the degenerate case where two cases have the same value.
 | 
						|
    if (CaseValues.size() == 2) {
 | 
						|
      Value *Cmp1 = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, CaseValues[0],
 | 
						|
                                         "switch.selectcmp.case1");
 | 
						|
      Value *Cmp2 = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, CaseValues[1],
 | 
						|
                                         "switch.selectcmp.case2");
 | 
						|
      Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateOr(Cmp1, Cmp2, "switch.selectcmp");
 | 
						|
      return Builder.CreateSelect(Cmp, ResultVector[0].first, DefaultResult);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return nullptr;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
 | 
						|
// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
 | 
						|
static void removeSwitchAfterSelectFold(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
 | 
						|
                                        Value *SelectValue,
 | 
						|
                                        IRBuilder<> &Builder,
 | 
						|
                                        DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
 | 
						|
  std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *DestBB = PHI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU && !is_contained(predecessors(DestBB), SelectBB))
 | 
						|
    Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, SelectBB, DestBB});
 | 
						|
  Builder.CreateBr(DestBB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Remove the switch.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
 | 
						|
    PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
 | 
						|
  PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 4> RemovedSuccessors;
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (Succ == DestBB)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
 | 
						|
    if (DTU && RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ).second)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, SelectBB, Succ});
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  SI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If a switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
 | 
						|
/// successor block with only two different constant values, try to replace the
 | 
						|
/// switch with a select. Returns true if the fold was made.
 | 
						|
static bool trySwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
 | 
						|
                              DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
 | 
						|
                              const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  Constant *DefaultResult;
 | 
						|
  SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
 | 
						|
  // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
 | 
						|
  if (!initializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
 | 
						|
                             DL, TTI, /*MaxUniqueResults*/ 2))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
 | 
						|
  Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
 | 
						|
  Value *SelectValue =
 | 
						|
      foldSwitchToSelect(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
 | 
						|
  if (!SelectValue)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  removeSwitchAfterSelectFold(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder, DTU);
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
namespace {
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
 | 
						|
class SwitchLookupTable {
 | 
						|
public:
 | 
						|
  /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
 | 
						|
  /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
 | 
						|
  SwitchLookupTable(
 | 
						|
      Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
 | 
						|
      const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
 | 
						|
      Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
 | 
						|
  /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
 | 
						|
  Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
 | 
						|
  /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
 | 
						|
  static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
 | 
						|
                                 Type *ElementType);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
private:
 | 
						|
  // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
 | 
						|
  // different ways.
 | 
						|
  enum {
 | 
						|
    // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
 | 
						|
    // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
 | 
						|
    SingleValueKind,
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
 | 
						|
    // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
 | 
						|
    // and addition instead of a table lookup.
 | 
						|
    LinearMapKind,
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
 | 
						|
    // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
 | 
						|
    // shift and mask operations.
 | 
						|
    BitMapKind,
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
 | 
						|
    // instructions from the table.
 | 
						|
    ArrayKind
 | 
						|
  } Kind;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
 | 
						|
  Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
 | 
						|
  GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
} // end anonymous namespace
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
 | 
						|
    Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
 | 
						|
    const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
 | 
						|
    Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
 | 
						|
  assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
 | 
						|
  assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
 | 
						|
  SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Build up the table contents.
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
 | 
						|
  for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
 | 
						|
    Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
 | 
						|
    assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
 | 
						|
    TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
 | 
						|
      SingleValue = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
 | 
						|
  if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
 | 
						|
    assert(DefaultValue &&
 | 
						|
           "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
 | 
						|
    assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
 | 
						|
    for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
 | 
						|
      if (!TableContents[I])
 | 
						|
        TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
 | 
						|
      SingleValue = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
 | 
						|
  // that single value.
 | 
						|
  if (SingleValue) {
 | 
						|
    Kind = SingleValueKind;
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
 | 
						|
  // table index.
 | 
						|
  if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
 | 
						|
    bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
 | 
						|
    APInt PrevVal;
 | 
						|
    APInt DistToPrev;
 | 
						|
    assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
 | 
						|
    // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
 | 
						|
    for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
 | 
						|
      ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
 | 
						|
      if (!ConstVal) {
 | 
						|
        // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
 | 
						|
        // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
 | 
						|
        LinearMappingPossible = false;
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
 | 
						|
      if (I != 0) {
 | 
						|
        APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
 | 
						|
        if (I == 1) {
 | 
						|
          DistToPrev = Dist;
 | 
						|
        } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
 | 
						|
          LinearMappingPossible = false;
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      PrevVal = Val;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (LinearMappingPossible) {
 | 
						|
      LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
 | 
						|
      LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
 | 
						|
      Kind = LinearMapKind;
 | 
						|
      ++NumLinearMaps;
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
 | 
						|
  if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
 | 
						|
    IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
 | 
						|
    APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
 | 
						|
    for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
 | 
						|
      TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
 | 
						|
      // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
 | 
						|
      if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
 | 
						|
        ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
 | 
						|
        TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
 | 
						|
    BitMapElementTy = IT;
 | 
						|
    Kind = BitMapKind;
 | 
						|
    ++NumBitMaps;
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Store the table in an array.
 | 
						|
  ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
 | 
						|
  Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*isConstant=*/true,
 | 
						|
                             GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
 | 
						|
                             "switch.table." + FuncName);
 | 
						|
  Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
 | 
						|
  // Set the alignment to that of an array items. We will be only loading one
 | 
						|
  // value out of it.
 | 
						|
  Array->setAlignment(Align(DL.getPrefTypeAlignment(ValueType)));
 | 
						|
  Kind = ArrayKind;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  switch (Kind) {
 | 
						|
  case SingleValueKind:
 | 
						|
    return SingleValue;
 | 
						|
  case LinearMapKind: {
 | 
						|
    // Derive the result value from the input value.
 | 
						|
    Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
 | 
						|
                                          false, "switch.idx.cast");
 | 
						|
    if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
 | 
						|
      Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
 | 
						|
    if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
 | 
						|
      Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
 | 
						|
    return Result;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  case BitMapKind: {
 | 
						|
    // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
 | 
						|
    IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
 | 
						|
    // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
 | 
						|
    // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
 | 
						|
    Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
 | 
						|
    ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
 | 
						|
        ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
 | 
						|
        "switch.shiftamt");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Shift down.
 | 
						|
    Value *DownShifted =
 | 
						|
        Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
 | 
						|
    // Mask off.
 | 
						|
    return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  case ArrayKind: {
 | 
						|
    // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
 | 
						|
    IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
 | 
						|
    uint64_t TableSize =
 | 
						|
        Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
 | 
						|
    if (TableSize > (1ULL << std::min(IT->getBitWidth() - 1, 63u)))
 | 
						|
      Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
 | 
						|
          Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
 | 
						|
          "switch.tableidx.zext");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
 | 
						|
    Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
 | 
						|
                                           GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
 | 
						|
    return Builder.CreateLoad(
 | 
						|
        cast<ArrayType>(Array->getValueType())->getElementType(), GEP,
 | 
						|
        "switch.load");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
 | 
						|
                                           uint64_t TableSize,
 | 
						|
                                           Type *ElementType) {
 | 
						|
  auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
 | 
						|
  if (!IT)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
 | 
						|
  // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
 | 
						|
  if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool isTypeLegalForLookupTable(Type *Ty, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
 | 
						|
                                      const DataLayout &DL) {
 | 
						|
  // Allow any legal type.
 | 
						|
  if (TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty))
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(Ty);
 | 
						|
  if (!IT)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Also allow power of 2 integer types that have at least 8 bits and fit in
 | 
						|
  // a register. These types are common in frontend languages and targets
 | 
						|
  // usually support loads of these types.
 | 
						|
  // TODO: We could relax this to any integer that fits in a register and rely
 | 
						|
  // on ABI alignment and padding in the table to allow the load to be widened.
 | 
						|
  // Or we could widen the constants and truncate the load.
 | 
						|
  unsigned BitWidth = IT->getBitWidth();
 | 
						|
  return BitWidth >= 8 && isPowerOf2_32(BitWidth) &&
 | 
						|
         DL.fitsInLegalInteger(IT->getBitWidth());
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool isSwitchDense(uint64_t NumCases, uint64_t CaseRange) {
 | 
						|
  // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize
 | 
						|
  // mode. See also TargetLoweringBase::isSuitableForJumpTable(), which this
 | 
						|
  // function was based on.
 | 
						|
  const uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (CaseRange >= UINT64_MAX / 100)
 | 
						|
    return false; // Avoid multiplication overflows below.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return NumCases * 100 >= CaseRange * MinDensity;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
 | 
						|
  uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
 | 
						|
  uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
 | 
						|
  if (Range < Diff)
 | 
						|
    return false; // Overflow.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return isSwitchDense(Values.size(), Range);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
 | 
						|
/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
 | 
						|
// TODO: We could support larger than legal types by limiting based on the
 | 
						|
// number of loads required and/or table size. If the constants are small we
 | 
						|
// could use smaller table entries and extend after the load.
 | 
						|
static bool
 | 
						|
ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
 | 
						|
                       const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
 | 
						|
                       const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
 | 
						|
  if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize)
 | 
						|
    return false; // TableSize overflowed.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
 | 
						|
  bool HasIllegalType = false;
 | 
						|
  for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
 | 
						|
    Type *Ty = I.second;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Saturate this flag to true.
 | 
						|
    HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !isTypeLegalForLookupTable(Ty, TTI, DL);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Saturate this flag to false.
 | 
						|
    AllTablesFitInRegister =
 | 
						|
        AllTablesFitInRegister &&
 | 
						|
        SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
 | 
						|
    // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
 | 
						|
    // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
 | 
						|
    if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
 | 
						|
  if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
 | 
						|
  if (HasIllegalType)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return isSwitchDense(SI->getNumCases(), TableSize);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool ShouldUseSwitchConditionAsTableIndex(
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt &MinCaseVal, const ConstantInt &MaxCaseVal,
 | 
						|
    bool HasDefaultResults, const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes,
 | 
						|
    const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  if (MinCaseVal.isNullValue())
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  if (MinCaseVal.isNegative() ||
 | 
						|
      MaxCaseVal.getLimitedValue() == std::numeric_limits<uint64_t>::max() ||
 | 
						|
      !HasDefaultResults)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  return all_of(ResultTypes, [&](const auto &KV) {
 | 
						|
    return SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(
 | 
						|
        DL, MaxCaseVal.getLimitedValue() + 1 /* TableSize */,
 | 
						|
        KV.second /* ResultType */);
 | 
						|
  });
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
 | 
						|
/// \code
 | 
						|
///     if (idx < tablesize)
 | 
						|
///        r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
 | 
						|
///     else
 | 
						|
///        r = default_value;
 | 
						|
///     if (r != default_value)
 | 
						|
///        ...
 | 
						|
/// \endcode
 | 
						|
/// Is optimized to:
 | 
						|
/// \code
 | 
						|
///     cond = idx < tablesize;
 | 
						|
///     if (cond)
 | 
						|
///        r = table[idx];
 | 
						|
///     else
 | 
						|
///        r = default_value;
 | 
						|
///     if (cond)
 | 
						|
///        ...
 | 
						|
/// \endcode
 | 
						|
/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
 | 
						|
static void reuseTableCompare(
 | 
						|
    User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
 | 
						|
    Constant *DefaultValue,
 | 
						|
    const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
 | 
						|
  ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
 | 
						|
  if (!CmpInst)
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
 | 
						|
  // threading can do its work afterwards.
 | 
						|
  if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
 | 
						|
  if (!CmpOp1)
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
 | 
						|
  Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
 | 
						|
  Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
 | 
						|
                                                 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
 | 
						|
  if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
 | 
						|
  // compare result.
 | 
						|
  for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
 | 
						|
    Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
 | 
						|
                                                ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
 | 
						|
    if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst ||
 | 
						|
        (CaseConst != TrueConst && CaseConst != FalseConst))
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
 | 
						|
  // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
 | 
						|
  // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
 | 
						|
  // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *Pred : predecessors(PhiBlock)) {
 | 
						|
    if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
 | 
						|
    // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
 | 
						|
    CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
 | 
						|
    ++NumTableCmpReuses;
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
 | 
						|
    Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
 | 
						|
        RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
 | 
						|
        RangeCheckBranch);
 | 
						|
    CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
 | 
						|
    ++NumTableCmpReuses;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
 | 
						|
/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
 | 
						|
/// lookup tables.
 | 
						|
static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
 | 
						|
                                DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const DataLayout &DL,
 | 
						|
                                const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
 | 
						|
  // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
 | 
						|
  // attribute is not set.
 | 
						|
  if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
 | 
						|
      (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsBool()))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
 | 
						|
  // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
 | 
						|
  // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
 | 
						|
  // string and lookup indices into that.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
 | 
						|
  // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
 | 
						|
  if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
 | 
						|
  // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
 | 
						|
  assert(!SI->cases().empty());
 | 
						|
  SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
 | 
						|
  SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
 | 
						|
  SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
 | 
						|
    if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
 | 
						|
      MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
 | 
						|
    if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
 | 
						|
      MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
 | 
						|
    using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
 | 
						|
    ResultsTy Results;
 | 
						|
    if (!getCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
 | 
						|
                        Results, DL, TTI))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
 | 
						|
    for (const auto &I : Results) {
 | 
						|
      PHINode *PHI = I.first;
 | 
						|
      Constant *Value = I.second;
 | 
						|
      if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
 | 
						|
        PHIs.push_back(PHI);
 | 
						|
      ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Keep track of the result types.
 | 
						|
  for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
 | 
						|
    ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
 | 
						|
  // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
 | 
						|
  bool HasDefaultResults =
 | 
						|
      getCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
 | 
						|
                     DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
 | 
						|
    PHINode *PHI = I.first;
 | 
						|
    Constant *Result = I.second;
 | 
						|
    DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool UseSwitchConditionAsTableIndex = ShouldUseSwitchConditionAsTableIndex(
 | 
						|
      *MinCaseVal, *MaxCaseVal, HasDefaultResults, ResultTypes, DL, TTI);
 | 
						|
  uint64_t TableSize;
 | 
						|
  if (UseSwitchConditionAsTableIndex)
 | 
						|
    TableSize = MaxCaseVal->getLimitedValue() + 1;
 | 
						|
  else
 | 
						|
    TableSize =
 | 
						|
        (MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue()).getLimitedValue() + 1;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
 | 
						|
  bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
 | 
						|
  if (NeedMask) {
 | 
						|
    // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
 | 
						|
    if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Create the BB that does the lookups.
 | 
						|
  Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
 | 
						|
      Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Compute the table index value.
 | 
						|
  Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
 | 
						|
  Value *TableIndex;
 | 
						|
  ConstantInt *TableIndexOffset;
 | 
						|
  if (UseSwitchConditionAsTableIndex) {
 | 
						|
    TableIndexOffset = ConstantInt::get(MaxCaseVal->getType(), 0);
 | 
						|
    TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    TableIndexOffset = MinCaseVal;
 | 
						|
    TableIndex =
 | 
						|
        Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), TableIndexOffset, "switch.tableidx");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
 | 
						|
  // switching upon.
 | 
						|
  unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
 | 
						|
  uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
 | 
						|
  assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
 | 
						|
         "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
 | 
						|
         "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
 | 
						|
  // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
 | 
						|
  // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
 | 
						|
  const bool DefaultIsReachable =
 | 
						|
      !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
 | 
						|
  const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
 | 
						|
  BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
 | 
						|
    Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
 | 
						|
    if (DTU)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, LookupBB});
 | 
						|
    // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
 | 
						|
    // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
 | 
						|
        TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
 | 
						|
    RangeCheckBranch =
 | 
						|
        Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
 | 
						|
    if (DTU)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, BB, LookupBB});
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
 | 
						|
  Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (NeedMask) {
 | 
						|
    // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
 | 
						|
    // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
 | 
						|
    MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
 | 
						|
    LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
 | 
						|
                                  CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
 | 
						|
    // unnecessary illegal types.
 | 
						|
    uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
 | 
						|
    APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
 | 
						|
    APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
 | 
						|
    // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
 | 
						|
    const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
 | 
						|
    for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
 | 
						|
      uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - TableIndexOffset->getValue())
 | 
						|
                         .getLimitedValue();
 | 
						|
      MaskInt |= One << Idx;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
 | 
						|
    // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
 | 
						|
    // else continue with table lookup.
 | 
						|
    IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
 | 
						|
    Value *MaskIndex =
 | 
						|
        Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
 | 
						|
    Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
 | 
						|
    Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
 | 
						|
        Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
 | 
						|
    Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
 | 
						|
    if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, MaskBB, LookupBB});
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, MaskBB, SI->getDefaultDest()});
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
 | 
						|
    AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, BB);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
 | 
						|
    // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
 | 
						|
    // do not delete PHINodes here.
 | 
						|
    SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(BB,
 | 
						|
                                            /*KeepOneInputPHIs=*/true);
 | 
						|
    if (DTU)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, SI->getDefaultDest()});
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
 | 
						|
    const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
 | 
						|
    Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
 | 
						|
    StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
 | 
						|
    SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, TableIndexOffset, ResultList, DV,
 | 
						|
                            DL, FuncName);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
 | 
						|
    // possible.
 | 
						|
    if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
 | 
						|
      BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
 | 
						|
      // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
 | 
						|
      for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
 | 
						|
        reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, LookupBB, CommonDest});
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Remove the switch.
 | 
						|
  SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 8> RemovedSuccessors;
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
 | 
						|
    if (DTU && RemovedSuccessors.insert(Succ).second)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, Succ});
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  SI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU)
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  ++NumLookupTables;
 | 
						|
  if (NeedMask)
 | 
						|
    ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
 | 
						|
/// of cases.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
 | 
						|
/// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
 | 
						|
/// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
 | 
						|
static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
 | 
						|
                              const DataLayout &DL,
 | 
						|
                              const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
 | 
						|
  auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
 | 
						|
  if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
 | 
						|
      !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
 | 
						|
  // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
 | 
						|
  if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
 | 
						|
  // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
 | 
						|
  // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
 | 
						|
  // as signed.
 | 
						|
  SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
 | 
						|
  for (const auto &C : SI->cases())
 | 
						|
    Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
 | 
						|
  llvm::sort(Values);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
 | 
						|
  if (isSwitchDense(Values))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
 | 
						|
  int64_t Base = Values[0];
 | 
						|
  for (auto &V : Values)
 | 
						|
    V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
 | 
						|
  // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
 | 
						|
  // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it
 | 
						|
  // results in a single rotate operation being inserted.
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
 | 
						|
  // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
 | 
						|
  // as the key function.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // countTrailingZeros(0) returns 64. As Values is guaranteed to have more than
 | 
						|
  // one element and LLVM disallows duplicate cases, Shift is guaranteed to be
 | 
						|
  // less than 64.
 | 
						|
  unsigned Shift = 64;
 | 
						|
  for (auto &V : Values)
 | 
						|
    Shift = std::min(Shift, countTrailingZeros((uint64_t)V));
 | 
						|
  assert(Shift < 64);
 | 
						|
  if (Shift > 0)
 | 
						|
    for (auto &V : Values)
 | 
						|
      V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
 | 
						|
    // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
 | 
						|
  // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
 | 
						|
  //   C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
 | 
						|
  // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
 | 
						|
  // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
 | 
						|
  // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
 | 
						|
  // default case.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
 | 
						|
  Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
 | 
						|
  auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
 | 
						|
  auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
 | 
						|
  auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
 | 
						|
  auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
 | 
						|
  auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
 | 
						|
  SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
 | 
						|
    auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
 | 
						|
    auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
 | 
						|
    Case.setValue(
 | 
						|
        cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
 | 
						|
    // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
 | 
						|
    // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
 | 
						|
    if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
 | 
						|
      if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
 | 
						|
        return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
    if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
 | 
						|
      if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
 | 
						|
        return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
 | 
						|
    // away into any preds.
 | 
						|
    if (SI == &*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(false).begin())
 | 
						|
      if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
 | 
						|
        return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
 | 
						|
  // The conversion from switch to comparison may lose information on
 | 
						|
  // impossible switch values, so disable it early in the pipeline.
 | 
						|
  if (Options.ConvertSwitchRangeToICmp && TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Remove unreachable cases.
 | 
						|
  if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, DTU, Options.AC, DL))
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (trySwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, DTU, DL, TTI))
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
 | 
						|
  // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
 | 
						|
  // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
 | 
						|
  // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
 | 
						|
  // optimisation pipeline.
 | 
						|
  if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
 | 
						|
      SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DTU, DL, TTI))
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  bool Changed = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Eliminate redundant destinations.
 | 
						|
  SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
 | 
						|
  SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 8> RemovedSuccs;
 | 
						|
  for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
 | 
						|
    if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
 | 
						|
      if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken())
 | 
						|
        RemovedSuccs.insert(Dest);
 | 
						|
      Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
 | 
						|
      IBI->removeDestination(i);
 | 
						|
      --i;
 | 
						|
      --e;
 | 
						|
      Changed = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
    std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
 | 
						|
    Updates.reserve(RemovedSuccs.size());
 | 
						|
    for (auto *RemovedSucc : RemovedSuccs)
 | 
						|
      Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, RemovedSucc});
 | 
						|
    DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
 | 
						|
    // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
 | 
						|
    new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
 | 
						|
    EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
 | 
						|
    // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
 | 
						|
    BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
 | 
						|
    EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
 | 
						|
    if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
 | 
						|
      return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return Changed;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
 | 
						|
/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with.  This
 | 
						|
/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
 | 
						|
/// a shared handler.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
 | 
						|
/// here.  That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere.  In
 | 
						|
/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
 | 
						|
/// when dealing with exception dense code.  (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
 | 
						|
/// sinking in this file)
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// This is primarily a code size optimization.  We need to avoid performing
 | 
						|
/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
 | 
						|
/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning).  We do this by not
 | 
						|
/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi.  Since the same
 | 
						|
/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't lose any ability to
 | 
						|
/// specialize.  If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
 | 
						|
///
 | 
						|
/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
 | 
						|
/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
 | 
						|
/// merged.  In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
 | 
						|
static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
 | 
						|
                                 BasicBlock *BB, DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
 | 
						|
  auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
 | 
						|
  assert(Succ);
 | 
						|
  // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
 | 
						|
  // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
 | 
						|
  if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
 | 
						|
    if (BB == OtherPred)
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
 | 
						|
    LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
 | 
						|
    if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
 | 
						|
      ;
 | 
						|
    BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
 | 
						|
    if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    std::vector<DominatorTree::UpdateType> Updates;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // We've found an identical block.  Update our predecessors to take that
 | 
						|
    // path instead and make ourselves dead.
 | 
						|
    SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 16> UniquePreds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
 | 
						|
    for (BasicBlock *Pred : UniquePreds) {
 | 
						|
      InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
 | 
						|
      assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
 | 
						|
             "unexpected successor");
 | 
						|
      II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
 | 
						|
      if (DTU) {
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Insert, Pred, OtherPred});
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, Pred, BB});
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
 | 
						|
    // used to go through BB.  We need to delete it or update it.
 | 
						|
    for (Instruction &Inst : llvm::make_early_inc_range(*OtherPred))
 | 
						|
      if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
 | 
						|
        Inst.eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 16> UniqueSuccs(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
 | 
						|
    for (BasicBlock *Succ : UniqueSuccs) {
 | 
						|
      Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
 | 
						|
      if (DTU)
 | 
						|
        Updates.push_back({DominatorTree::Delete, BB, Succ});
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
 | 
						|
    Builder.CreateUnreachable();
 | 
						|
    BI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
    if (DTU)
 | 
						|
      DTU->applyUpdates(Updates);
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyBranch(BranchInst *Branch, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  return Branch->isUnconditional() ? simplifyUncondBranch(Branch, Builder)
 | 
						|
                                   : simplifyCondBranch(Branch, Builder);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
 | 
						|
                                          IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
 | 
						|
  // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
 | 
						|
  // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
 | 
						|
  // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
 | 
						|
  // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
 | 
						|
  // Note that if BB has only one predecessor then we do not introduce new
 | 
						|
  // backedge, so we can eliminate BB.
 | 
						|
  bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
 | 
						|
      Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
 | 
						|
      (!LoopHeaders.empty() && BB->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(2) &&
 | 
						|
       (is_contained(LoopHeaders, BB) || is_contained(LoopHeaders, Succ)));
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg(true)->getIterator();
 | 
						|
  if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
 | 
						|
      !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB, DTU))
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
 | 
						|
  // constant, try to simplify the block.
 | 
						|
  if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
 | 
						|
    if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
 | 
						|
      for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
 | 
						|
        ;
 | 
						|
      if (I->isTerminator() &&
 | 
						|
          tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder))
 | 
						|
        return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
 | 
						|
  // equivalent.
 | 
						|
  if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
 | 
						|
    for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
 | 
						|
      ;
 | 
						|
    if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB, DTU))
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
 | 
						|
  // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
 | 
						|
  // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
 | 
						|
  // for PHI nodes in common successor.
 | 
						|
  if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DTU, /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, &TTI,
 | 
						|
                             Options.BonusInstThreshold))
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
 | 
						|
    BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
 | 
						|
    if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
 | 
						|
      return nullptr;
 | 
						|
    PredPred = PPred;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return PredPred;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
 | 
						|
  assert(
 | 
						|
      !isa<ConstantInt>(BI->getCondition()) &&
 | 
						|
      BI->getSuccessor(0) != BI->getSuccessor(1) &&
 | 
						|
      "Tautological conditional branch should have been eliminated already.");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
 | 
						|
  if (!Options.SimplifyCondBranch)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Conditional branch
 | 
						|
  if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
 | 
						|
    // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
 | 
						|
    // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
 | 
						|
    // switch.
 | 
						|
    if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
 | 
						|
      if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
 | 
						|
        return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
 | 
						|
    // Ignore dbg and pseudo intrinsics.
 | 
						|
    auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug(true).begin();
 | 
						|
    if (&*I == BI) {
 | 
						|
      if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
 | 
						|
        return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
    } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
 | 
						|
      ++I;
 | 
						|
      if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
 | 
						|
        return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
 | 
						|
  if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If this basic block has dominating predecessor blocks and the dominating
 | 
						|
  // blocks' conditions imply BI's condition, we know the direction of BI.
 | 
						|
  Optional<bool> Imp = isImpliedByDomCondition(BI->getCondition(), BI, DL);
 | 
						|
  if (Imp) {
 | 
						|
    // Turn this into a branch on constant.
 | 
						|
    auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
    ConstantInt *TorF = *Imp ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
 | 
						|
                             : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
 | 
						|
    BI->setCondition(TorF);
 | 
						|
    RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
 | 
						|
  // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
 | 
						|
  // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
 | 
						|
  if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DTU, /*MSSAU=*/nullptr, &TTI,
 | 
						|
                             Options.BonusInstThreshold))
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
 | 
						|
  // from BI.  We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
 | 
						|
  // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks.  If so, we
 | 
						|
  // can hoist it up to the branching block.
 | 
						|
  if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
 | 
						|
    if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
 | 
						|
      if (HoistCommon &&
 | 
						|
          HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI, !Options.HoistCommonInsts))
 | 
						|
        return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
 | 
						|
      // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
 | 
						|
      Instruction *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
 | 
						|
      if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
 | 
						|
          Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
 | 
						|
        if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
 | 
						|
          return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
 | 
						|
    // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
 | 
						|
    // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
 | 
						|
    Instruction *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
 | 
						|
    if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
 | 
						|
        Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
 | 
						|
      if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
 | 
						|
        return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If this is a branch on something for which we know the constant value in
 | 
						|
  // predecessors (e.g. a phi node in the current block), thread control
 | 
						|
  // through this block.
 | 
						|
  if (FoldCondBranchOnValueKnownInPredecessor(BI, DTU, DL, Options.AC))
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
 | 
						|
  for (BasicBlock *Pred : predecessors(BB))
 | 
						|
    if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
 | 
						|
      if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
 | 
						|
        if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
 | 
						|
          return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Look for diamond patterns.
 | 
						|
  if (MergeCondStores)
 | 
						|
    if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
 | 
						|
      if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
 | 
						|
        if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
 | 
						|
          if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DTU, DL, TTI))
 | 
						|
            return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
 | 
						|
static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I, bool PtrValueMayBeModified) {
 | 
						|
  Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
 | 
						|
  if (!C)
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (I->use_empty())
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
 | 
						|
    // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
 | 
						|
    auto *Use = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
 | 
						|
    // Bail out if Use is not in the same BB as I or Use == I or Use comes
 | 
						|
    // before I in the block. The latter two can be the case if Use is a PHI
 | 
						|
    // node.
 | 
						|
    if (Use->getParent() != I->getParent() || Use == I || Use->comesBefore(I))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
 | 
						|
    // control flow (eg. calls)
 | 
						|
    auto InstrRange =
 | 
						|
        make_range(std::next(I->getIterator()), Use->getIterator());
 | 
						|
    if (any_of(InstrRange, [](Instruction &I) {
 | 
						|
          return !isGuaranteedToTransferExecutionToSuccessor(&I);
 | 
						|
        }))
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
 | 
						|
    if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
 | 
						|
      if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I) {
 | 
						|
        if (!GEP->isInBounds() || !GEP->hasAllZeroIndices())
 | 
						|
          PtrValueMayBeModified = true;
 | 
						|
        return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP, PtrValueMayBeModified);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Look through bitcasts.
 | 
						|
    if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
 | 
						|
      return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC, PtrValueMayBeModified);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Load from null is undefined.
 | 
						|
    if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
 | 
						|
      if (!LI->isVolatile())
 | 
						|
        return !NullPointerIsDefined(LI->getFunction(),
 | 
						|
                                     LI->getPointerAddressSpace());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Store to null is undefined.
 | 
						|
    if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
 | 
						|
      if (!SI->isVolatile())
 | 
						|
        return (!NullPointerIsDefined(SI->getFunction(),
 | 
						|
                                      SI->getPointerAddressSpace())) &&
 | 
						|
               SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (auto *CB = dyn_cast<CallBase>(Use)) {
 | 
						|
      if (C->isNullValue() && NullPointerIsDefined(CB->getFunction()))
 | 
						|
        return false;
 | 
						|
      // A call to null is undefined.
 | 
						|
      if (CB->getCalledOperand() == I)
 | 
						|
        return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (C->isNullValue()) {
 | 
						|
        for (const llvm::Use &Arg : CB->args())
 | 
						|
          if (Arg == I) {
 | 
						|
            unsigned ArgIdx = CB->getArgOperandNo(&Arg);
 | 
						|
            if (CB->isPassingUndefUB(ArgIdx) &&
 | 
						|
                CB->paramHasAttr(ArgIdx, Attribute::NonNull)) {
 | 
						|
              // Passing null to a nonnnull+noundef argument is undefined.
 | 
						|
              return !PtrValueMayBeModified;
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
      } else if (isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
 | 
						|
        // Passing undef to a noundef argument is undefined.
 | 
						|
        for (const llvm::Use &Arg : CB->args())
 | 
						|
          if (Arg == I) {
 | 
						|
            unsigned ArgIdx = CB->getArgOperandNo(&Arg);
 | 
						|
            if (CB->isPassingUndefUB(ArgIdx)) {
 | 
						|
              // Passing undef to a noundef argument is undefined.
 | 
						|
              return true;
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
 | 
						|
/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
 | 
						|
static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB,
 | 
						|
                                              DomTreeUpdater *DTU) {
 | 
						|
  for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
 | 
						|
    for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
 | 
						|
      if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
 | 
						|
        BasicBlock *Predecessor = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i);
 | 
						|
        Instruction *T = Predecessor->getTerminator();
 | 
						|
        IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
 | 
						|
        if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
 | 
						|
          BB->removePredecessor(Predecessor);
 | 
						|
          // Turn unconditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
 | 
						|
          // destination from conditional branches.
 | 
						|
          if (BI->isUnconditional())
 | 
						|
            Builder.CreateUnreachable();
 | 
						|
          else {
 | 
						|
            // Preserve guarding condition in assume, because it might not be
 | 
						|
            // inferrable from any dominating condition.
 | 
						|
            Value *Cond = BI->getCondition();
 | 
						|
            if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB)
 | 
						|
              Builder.CreateAssumption(Builder.CreateNot(Cond));
 | 
						|
            else
 | 
						|
              Builder.CreateAssumption(Cond);
 | 
						|
            Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
 | 
						|
                                                       : BI->getSuccessor(0));
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          BI->eraseFromParent();
 | 
						|
          if (DTU)
 | 
						|
            DTU->applyUpdates({{DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB}});
 | 
						|
          return true;
 | 
						|
        } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(T)) {
 | 
						|
          // Redirect all branches leading to UB into
 | 
						|
          // a newly created unreachable block.
 | 
						|
          BasicBlock *Unreachable = BasicBlock::Create(
 | 
						|
              Predecessor->getContext(), "unreachable", BB->getParent(), BB);
 | 
						|
          Builder.SetInsertPoint(Unreachable);
 | 
						|
          // The new block contains only one instruction: Unreachable
 | 
						|
          Builder.CreateUnreachable();
 | 
						|
          for (const auto &Case : SI->cases())
 | 
						|
            if (Case.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
 | 
						|
              BB->removePredecessor(Predecessor);
 | 
						|
              Case.setSuccessor(Unreachable);
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          if (SI->getDefaultDest() == BB) {
 | 
						|
            BB->removePredecessor(Predecessor);
 | 
						|
            SI->setDefaultDest(Unreachable);
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          if (DTU)
 | 
						|
            DTU->applyUpdates(
 | 
						|
                { { DominatorTree::Insert, Predecessor, Unreachable },
 | 
						|
                  { DominatorTree::Delete, Predecessor, BB } });
 | 
						|
          return true;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB) {
 | 
						|
  bool Changed = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
 | 
						|
  assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
 | 
						|
  // or that just have themself as a predecessor.  These are unreachable.
 | 
						|
  if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
 | 
						|
      BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
 | 
						|
    LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
 | 
						|
    DeleteDeadBlock(BB, DTU);
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
 | 
						|
  // away...
 | 
						|
  Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, /*DeleteDeadConditions=*/true,
 | 
						|
                                    /*TLI=*/nullptr, DTU);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
 | 
						|
  Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
 | 
						|
  if (removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB, DTU))
 | 
						|
    return requestResimplify();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
 | 
						|
  // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
 | 
						|
  // if there are no PHI nodes.
 | 
						|
  if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB, DTU))
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
 | 
						|
    if (SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB, DTU) ||
 | 
						|
        MergeCompatibleInvokes(BB, DTU)) {
 | 
						|
      // SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors() does not automatically CSE PHI's,
 | 
						|
      // so we may now how duplicate PHI's.
 | 
						|
      // Let's rerun EliminateDuplicatePHINodes() first,
 | 
						|
      // before FoldTwoEntryPHINode() potentially converts them into select's,
 | 
						|
      // after which we'd need a whole EarlyCSE pass run to cleanup them.
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (Options.FoldTwoEntryPHINode) {
 | 
						|
    // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
 | 
						|
    // eliminate it, do so now.
 | 
						|
    if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
 | 
						|
      if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
 | 
						|
        if (FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DTU, DL))
 | 
						|
          return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Instruction *Terminator = BB->getTerminator();
 | 
						|
  Builder.SetInsertPoint(Terminator);
 | 
						|
  switch (Terminator->getOpcode()) {
 | 
						|
  case Instruction::Br:
 | 
						|
    Changed |= simplifyBranch(cast<BranchInst>(Terminator), Builder);
 | 
						|
    break;
 | 
						|
  case Instruction::Resume:
 | 
						|
    Changed |= simplifyResume(cast<ResumeInst>(Terminator), Builder);
 | 
						|
    break;
 | 
						|
  case Instruction::CleanupRet:
 | 
						|
    Changed |= simplifyCleanupReturn(cast<CleanupReturnInst>(Terminator));
 | 
						|
    break;
 | 
						|
  case Instruction::Switch:
 | 
						|
    Changed |= simplifySwitch(cast<SwitchInst>(Terminator), Builder);
 | 
						|
    break;
 | 
						|
  case Instruction::Unreachable:
 | 
						|
    Changed |= simplifyUnreachable(cast<UnreachableInst>(Terminator));
 | 
						|
    break;
 | 
						|
  case Instruction::IndirectBr:
 | 
						|
    Changed |= simplifyIndirectBr(cast<IndirectBrInst>(Terminator));
 | 
						|
    break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return Changed;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
 | 
						|
  bool Changed = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Repeated simplify BB as long as resimplification is requested.
 | 
						|
  do {
 | 
						|
    Resimplify = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Perform one round of simplifcation. Resimplify flag will be set if
 | 
						|
    // another iteration is requested.
 | 
						|
    Changed |= simplifyOnce(BB);
 | 
						|
  } while (Resimplify);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return Changed;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
 | 
						|
                       DomTreeUpdater *DTU, const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
 | 
						|
                       ArrayRef<WeakVH> LoopHeaders) {
 | 
						|
  return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, DTU, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
 | 
						|
                        Options)
 | 
						|
      .run(BB);
 | 
						|
}
 |